diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-05 22:24:28 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-05 22:24:28 -0800 |
| commit | 64d8dfbe1332288ba71386b793152948ef31d7be (patch) | |
| tree | 59c6bb0bae47ca04de01edb32871c49b88acacef | |
| parent | 2139a83bf5be530b62208df09a3173dded098401 (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h.zip | bin | 752711 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/52143-h.htm | 4618 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 74524 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 74549 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i021.jpg | bin | 74756 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i037.jpg | bin | 74451 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i053.jpg | bin | 74745 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i071.jpg | bin | 75359 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i085.jpg | bin | 75177 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i099.jpg | bin | 74947 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/i115.jpg | bin | 74960 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143-h/images/logo.jpg | bin | 9884 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143.txt | 4478 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52143.zip | bin | 65183 -> 0 bytes |
17 files changed, 17 insertions, 9096 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0dd2eb --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #52143 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/52143) diff --git a/old/52143-h.zip b/old/52143-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 66185ba..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/52143-h.htm b/old/52143-h/52143-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 634cf5e..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/52143-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4618 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> - -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Fairview Boys At Lighthouse Cove, by Frederick Gordon. - </title> - <style type="text/css"> - - p { margin-top: .75em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .75em; - } - - p.bold {text-align: center; font-weight: bold;} - p.bold2 {text-align: center; font-weight: bold; font-size: 150%;} - - h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; - } - h1 span, h2 span { display: block; text-align: center; } - #id1 { font-size: smaller } - - - hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; - } - - hr.smler { - width: 10%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 45%; - margin-right: 45%; - clear: both; - } - - body{margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - } - - table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; padding: 5px; border-collapse: collapse; border: none; text-align: right;} - - .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - text-indent: 0px; - } /* page numbers */ - - .center {text-align: center;} - .smaller {font-size: smaller;} - .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - .box {max-width: 20em; margin: 1.5em auto; border: 4px black solid; padding: 10px;} - .space-above {margin-top: 3em;} - .left {text-align: left;} - - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove, by -Frederick Gordon and R. Menel - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - -Title: Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove - or, Carried out to Sea - -Author: Frederick Gordon - R. Menel - -Release Date: May 23, 2016 [EBook #52143] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE *** - - - - -Produced by Martin Pettit and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - -</pre> - - -<div class="center"><a name="cover.jpg" id="cover.jpg"></a><img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="cover" /></div> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span></p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i002.jpg" alt="They crowded to the rail eager for their rescue." /></div> - -<p class="bold">They crowded to the rail eager for their rescue.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p> - -<h1>FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHT-<br />HOUSE COVE</h1> - -<p class="bold">OR</p> - -<p class="bold">CARRIED OUT TO SEA</p> - -<p class="bold space-above">BY</p> - -<p class="bold2">FREDERICK GORDON</p> - -<p class="bold">AUTHOR OF "FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE," "FAIRVIEW<br /> -BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS," "FAIRVIEW BOYS<br />AT CAMP MYSTERY," ETC.</p> - -<p class="bold space-above"><i>ILLUSTRATED</i></p> - -<p class="bold space-above">CHARLES E. GRAHAM & CO.<br />NEWARK, N. J. —— NEW YORK</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span></p> - -<div class="box"> -<h2>BOOKS FOR BOYS</h2> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p class="bold"><span class="smcap">By</span> FREDERICK GORDON</p> - -<p class="bold2">FAIRVIEW BOYS SERIES</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p class="bold">Illustrated. Price, per volume,<br />75 cents, postpaid.</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p>FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, The Young Crusoes of Pine Island</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS ON EAGLE MOUNTAIN<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Bob Bouncer's Schooldays</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, The Old Hermit and His Secret</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Carried Out to Sea</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS ON A RANCH<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Riding with the Cowboys</span></p></div> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1914, by</span></p> - -<p class="center">GRAHAM & MATLACK</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p class="center"><i>Fairview Boys At Lighthouse Cove</i></p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span></p> - -<h2>CONTENTS</h2> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<table summary="CONTENTS"> - <tr> - <td colspan="2" class="left"><span class="smaller">CHAPTER</span></td> - <td><span class="smaller">PAGE</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>I.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Vacation Plans</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_7">7</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>II.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">At Lighthouse Cove</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_15">15</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>III.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Sammy Gets a Clue</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>IV.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">In the Lighthouse</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_31">31</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>V.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Dark Beacon</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_41">41</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>VI.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Just in Time</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_48">48</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>VII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">On the Trail</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_55">55</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>VIII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Driven Back</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>IX.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">In the Boat</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_70">70</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>X.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Carried Out to Sea</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_80">80</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XI.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">In the Storm</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Drifting</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_95">95</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XIII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Abandoned Boat</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_104">104</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XIV.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Rescue</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_110">110</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XV.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Two Mysteries Cleared Up</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_120">120</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span></p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/logo.jpg" alt="logo" /></div> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span></p> - -<p class="bold2">Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove</p> - -<p class="bold">OR</p> - -<p class="bold">CARRIED OUT TO SEA</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER I</span> <span class="smaller">VACATION PLANS</span></h2> - -<p>"Last day of school; hurray!"</p> - -<p>"No more lessons! No more books!"</p> - -<p>"Nothing but fun, from now on! I say, Frank, catch Sammy; he's going to -fall!"</p> - -<p>Three boys were standing together in the school yard, making merry over -the coming of the Summer vacation. The last one who spoke was a -jolly-looking lad, with a gleam of mischief in his eyes. Suddenly he put -out his foot, caught it around the ankle of one of his companions, and -gently pushed him over backwards.</p> - -<p>"Catch Sammy, Frank!" he cried, and the other boy grasped the toppling -one just in time.</p> - -<p>"I told you so!" cried the fun-loving lad, as he sprang to one side.</p> - -<p>"Look here, Bob Bouncer, what do you mean by that?" demanded the one who -had been pushed, as he stood upright again. "What did you do that for?" -and he started toward his companion.</p> - -<p>"Oh, it was only a joke," answered the one who had been called Bob -Bouncer. "I wanted to have some fun. I feel<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span> just full of fun when I -think what good times I'm going to have this Summer."</p> - -<p>"Huh! just because you feel good you needn't knock me all around," went -on Sammy Brown. But, though he spoke a bit crossly he could not help -smiling at Bob, who was making funny faces, and dancing about, just out -of reach.</p> - -<p>"I didn't hurt you," cried Bob, who was generally "cutting-up," or -thinking up some joke to play on his chums. "I waited until Frank was -there to catch you before I shoved you."</p> - -<p>"Humph! You're getting mighty thoughtful, all of a sudden," said Bob. -"What about it, Frank?"</p> - -<p>"That's right," answered the third lad. "I didn't know what he meant -when he said I was to catch you, for you were going to fall. Let up, -Bob, can't you?"</p> - -<p>"Yes, I won't do anything more—right away. But say, have you fellows -made any plans for this Summer?"</p> - -<p>"Oh, I s'pose the folks'll go way as they always do," said Frank. "My -father was talking about some place in the mountains."</p> - -<p>"Near a lake?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"I don't believe so. I didn't hear much about it."</p> - -<p>"Then I wouldn't go," said Sammy. "I want to be near the water. We're -going to a cottage near a big mountain lake, I think."</p> - -<p>"That sounds good!" cried Frank. "I wish we were going near a lake. I -want to learn to sail a boat the right way this year."</p> - -<p>"Yes, then we won't have any more shipwrecks, the way we did when we -went out in the <i>Puff</i>," laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Where are your folks going?" asked Frank, of the lad who had pushed Sam -into his arms.</p> - -<p>"To the seashore for ours! It's the first time since I was a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> little -fellow, and I'm going to have lots of fun. We're going on a sort of -cove, where there's still-water swimming, and lots of fishing and -crabbing. Not far off, is the regular ocean, but of course I won't be -allowed to do much swimming in that. I can hang on the bathing ropes, -though. Oh, I'm going to have some great times all right!"</p> - -<p>Bob Bouncer's two chums looked rather enviously at him. He seemed to be -going to have the best time that Summer vacation.</p> - -<p>About the three boys was gathered a crowd of other school children. -There was laughter, talk, and various kinds of excitement, for it was -the last day of the term, and, after some simple exercises, the building -would be closed for the long vacation.</p> - -<p>Because of this, discipline was a little relaxed. It was a little past -the regular opening hour, but the principal, Mr. Tetlow, did not want to -mark any one tardy on that last day, so he told the janitor not to be in -too much of a hurry to ring the bell.</p> - -<p>On all sides were heard questions,</p> - -<p>"Did you pass?"</p> - -<p>"Where are you going this Summer?"</p> - -<p>"Oh, did you hear about Henry Black?"</p> - -<p>"No, what about him?"</p> - -<p>"Why, he didn't pass again. This is the third time he'll be in the fifth -grade."</p> - -<p>"Oh, isn't that too bad! But you know he won't study."</p> - -<p>"No, he's too fond of fun."</p> - -<p>"Who are you talking about; Bob Bouncer?" asked someone who had just -come into the yard.</p> - -<p>"No, Henry Black."</p> - -<p>"Oh, him! Say, isn't it time we went in? I've got to speak a piece."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span></p><p>"I'm glad I don't have to. I'm only in the chorus."</p> - -<p>And so it went on, boys and girls from the higher grammar grades down to -the kindergarten, talking and laughing together.</p> - -<p>Finally, when the last of the straggling pupils had reached the school, -the bell was rung, calling them into the big auditorium, where the -closing exercises would be held. These would be over about noon, and -there would be no other session.</p> - -<p>After the usual exercises, singing, and the reading from the Bible, Mr. -Tetlow said that there would be music and declamation. That last was a -word the smaller pupils used but little. They called it "speaking -pieces."</p> - -<p>Nellie Somers was in the midst of declaiming a sad little piece about a -boy who had lost his pocketbook. She recited the line:</p> - -<p>"Where, oh, where, is Donald's money?"</p> - -<p>And then, suddenly, as she paused for a moment, Bob Bouncer said in a -shrill whisper:</p> - -<p>"Fellows, I've got it!"</p> - -<p>Instantly there was laughter, and poor Nellie, up on the platform, -blushed and was unable to go on. All eyes were shifted to Bob, who -turned red, and the principal, rising suddenly, looked sternly at the -lad.</p> - -<p>"Who said that?" he asked, sharply.</p> - -<p>"I—I did, sir," stammered Bob.</p> - -<p>"Why did you do it? Did you want to make trouble, and cause Nellie to -feel badly—saying you had the pocketbook she spoke of?"</p> - -<p>"No, sir. I didn't mean anything about a pocketbook. I wasn't even -listening to what Nellie said."</p> - -<p>"Then why did you speak? What did you mean when you said, so we all -could hear you, that you had it?"</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span></p><p>Bob looked first at Frank, and then at Sammy. They, too, were wondering -what he had meant by speaking aloud in school, especially during the -closing exercises.</p> - -<p>"I—I meant that I had an—idea," went on Bob, blushing redder than -before.</p> - -<p>"Well," said Mr. Tetlow, "perhaps you meant no wrong, but the next time -you get an idea, please don't announce it to the whole school that way, -and interrupt the proceedings." He was smiling now, and Bob knew he was -forgiven.</p> - -<p>Bob was usually a pretty good boy in school, and the principal realized -this, for a thing like that had never happened before. Bob's explanation -was accepted, and, as it was the last day, Mr. Tetlow did not want to -punish him.</p> - -<p>"Steady now! Quiet down!" said Mr. Tetlow to the pupils, for many of -them showed signs of laughter again. "We will overlook it this time, -Bob, but don't do it again. You may go on, Nellie. I think Bob is sorry -he interrupted you."</p> - -<p>"Yes, sir, I am," said Bob, earnestly.</p> - -<p>Nellie smiled down at him, for he and she were good friends. Then she -finished reciting her piece, and was applauded, and the rest of the -exercises went on. Then came the giving of diplomas to those who were to -graduate from the grammar department.</p> - -<p>This was followed by the awarding of some prizes, and certificates of -good conduct, and for prompt and punctual attendance. Then, with a final -song by the whole school, the program ended.</p> - -<p>"School is dismissed, until the middle of September!" announced Mr. -Tetlow, and with happy faces the children marched out to a lively tune, -played by Miss Williams, one of the teachers.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span></p><p>In the yard there was more talk and laughter, as the boys and girls -started for their homes.</p> - -<p>"Did you hear what Bob Bouncer said?"</p> - -<p>"Sure! We all did!"</p> - -<p>"Wasn't he terrible?"</p> - -<p>"And how awful Nellie must have felt! I was real sorry for her."</p> - -<p>"So was I. Bob was scared too, I guess."</p> - -<p>Thus Bob's companions talked about him.</p> - -<p>Frank and Sammy made their way through the crowd to the side of their -chum.</p> - -<p>"Say, what in the world was the matter with you?" demanded Frank.</p> - -<p>"Were you talking in your sleep?" Sammy wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"No, I wasn't," answered Bob, quickly. "It was just as I told Mr. -Tetlow. I suddenly got an idea, and, before I knew it, I popped out and -said it. I didn't even know Nellie was speaking, as I was thinking of -something else."</p> - -<p>"What was it?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Yes, you may as well tell us, now that you went that far," added Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Well, it was an idea about our Summer vacation," went on Bob. "Our -folks are going to the seashore, you know, and I don't see any reason -why you fellows can't come too."</p> - -<p>"There are two good reasons," said Frank. "I have one, and Sammy has the -other."</p> - -<p>"None of our folks are going to the shore," said Sammy. "I wish we were, -though, for we could have lots of fun together. Now we'll be a couple of -hundred miles apart," he added, in disappointed tones.</p> - -<p>"And that's just what my idea is about!" exclaimed Bob. "There's no use -in us being separated. Look here, fellows,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> our folks are going to take -a big cottage at the shore. It's too big a house for us, for I heard mom -say so. But we couldn't get a smaller one. But I'm glad of it, for now -there's going to be room for you two fellows. So why can't you come to -the shore with me?"</p> - -<p>"That would be swell!" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"It sure would," agreed Sammy. "But would our folks let us?"</p> - -<p>"The only way to find out is to ask!" declared Bob quickly. "Come on, -I'll go around with you and we'll see if they won't let you fellows go."</p> - -<p>"First you'd better find out if your mother will want us," suggested -Frank, who was quite practical, at times.</p> - -<p>"Yes, we don't want to invite ourselves," put in Sammy. "My mother will -be sure to ask first what your mother said, Bob."</p> - -<p>"All right, then, we can go around to my house, and I'll ask mom. But I -know she will want to have you. Say, maybe we won't have some good times -together this Summer!"</p> - -<p>"Where are you going?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"To a place called Lighthouse Cove. There's a lighthouse there, and -dangerous rocks, a bay, and——"</p> - -<p>"Any pirate treasure buried there?" asked Sammy, quickly.</p> - -<p>"Ho! Ho! Listen to him!" cried Frank. "There he goes again, making up a -mystery before he's even seen the place."</p> - -<p>"Well, there might be pirate gold!" cried Sammy, stoutly.</p> - -<p>"And you can have a hunt for it, if you'll only come," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I'll be sure to come if the folks will let me," replied Sammy. -"Come on, let's hurry."</p> - -<p>The three boys left their other school companions behind,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> and hastened -on toward Bob's house. As Bob had said she would, his mother readily -agreed to the plan of having Sammy and Frank go to the seashore cottage -with the Bouncer family.</p> - -<p>"Mr. Bouncer and I will be very glad to have you," she said to Sammy and -Frank. "You will be company for Bob, and I won't have to amuse him so -much. Come, by all means. I'll write notes to each of your mothers, -inviting you, and then they'll know it will be all right."</p> - -<p>The notes were soon ready, and Frank and Sammy, accompanied by Bob, set -off for the homes of the two chums, to get the desired permission.</p> - -<p>"Let me know whether or not you can go," Mrs. Bouncer called after Frank -and Sammy.</p> - -<p>"We will!" they chorused.</p> - -<p>"And if you do go, be sure to bring picks and shovels to dig for the -pirate gold," she added, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"What's that!" cried Sammy, eagerly, and he started back on the run -toward Mrs. Bouncer, who stood in the doorway of her house.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER II</span> <span class="smaller">AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE</span></h2> - -<p>"Here, where are you going, Sammy?"</p> - -<p>"Come back here, we want to get this thing settled!"</p> - -<p>Thus Frank and Bob called after their chum, who was headed toward where -Mrs. Bouncer still stood on the steps.</p> - -<p>"I'm going to find out about that pirate gold!" answered Sammy, never -turning around.</p> - -<p>"There he goes again!" cried Bob. "I wonder what mother meant by saying -that? She never told me about any pirates."</p> - -<p>"Maybe we'd better go back and see," suggested Frank. "We'll never get -the straight of it from Sammy."</p> - -<p>"All right, I'm with you," said Bob, and the two followed their chum.</p> - -<p>And while they are thus trying to get at the meaning of the remark made -by Mrs. Bouncer I will take just a few minutes to tell my new readers -something about the three chums and their friends, as well as about -their adventures, which I have set down in the other books of this -series.</p> - -<p>The first volume was named "Fairview Boys Afloat and Ashore; Or, The -Young Crusoes of Pine Island." In that I told how Frank Haven, Sammy -Brown and Bob Bouncer went sailing in the <i>Puff</i>, how the craft was -wrecked, and how the boys had to live on Pine Island for some days -before they were rescued.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span></p><p>"Fairview Boys on Eagle Mountain; Or, Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt," was -the name of the second book, and in that you can read how Sammy, in -looking through an old trunk in the attic, discovered a curious -document. It told of treasure, and he and his two chums at once set off -for Eagle Mountain to discover it.</p> - -<p>In the third book, called "Fairview Boys and their Rivals; Or, Bob -Bouncer's Schooldays," the chums had a different form of excitement. -There was a fire in the school and a jewelry store robbery. How the -stolen things were finally recovered, and what part Bob Bouncer had in -it, you will find set down in the book.</p> - -<p>Then came the fourth volume, called "Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery; Or, -The Old Hermit and His Secret." In that the boys had an invitation to -visit an old hunter, who lived on a part of Pine Island they had never -explored.</p> - -<p>Almost as soon as they reached the island the boys discovered a curious -aged hermit, who seemed very angry at them. They also found a mysterious -room, in an old mansion, and what they found there, how they were -startled by an explosion, and what the old hermit's secret was—all that -you will find written down in the fourth book.</p> - -<p>The boys spent most of the Christmas vacation on Pine Island, and now -winter was over, Spring had come and gone, Summer was at hand, and they -were ready for warm weather vacation fun.</p> - -<p>I might add just a line or two about the boys themselves. Frank Haven -was a straightforward, every-day kind of chap, with many likeable -qualities. He was a sort of leader for the other two, they generally -looking to him for advice.</p> - -<p>Bob Bouncer, as you have probably guessed, was a "cut-up." He liked -jokes and fun, but was never mean in them. He could never resist playing -tricks when he got the chance.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span></p><p>Sammy Brown was a queer chap. He was fond of reading stories of -adventures in strange countries, and he loved books on treasure hunting. -And it finally became so that, on the slightest chance, he would imagine -that he, himself, might one day discover a gold or diamond mine, or -stumble on some mysterious hoard of pirate gold.</p> - -<p>Once, as the readers of my other books know, Sammy did start on a -treasure hunt. It had an unexpected ending. And again Sammy was sure he -had discovered, on Pine Island, a band of men who made counterfeit -money. I leave you to find out for yourself what it really was he came -across.</p> - -<p>The boys lived in the town of Fairview, on the shores of Rainbow Lake, a -large body of water, containing many islands, the largest of them being -Pine.</p> - -<p>Bob and his two chums had many friends. They went to the same school, -were in the same class, and were so often together that it was strange -to see one of them out alone.</p> - -<p>They usually spent their Summer vacations together, and this was the -first time, in some years, that there was a prospect of parting. But Bob -believed he had gotten up a plan that would avoid this. It was this plan -which was about to be put to the test on this last day of school.</p> - -<p>"Wait a minute; can't you, Sammy?" called Bob to his chum, who was -hurrying toward Mrs. Bouncer. "Don't go so fast. My mother isn't going -to run away."</p> - -<p>"I guess maybe he thinks someone else will get ahead of him, and find -that pirate gold," suggested Frank. "It's queer your mother never told -you about it."</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's a joke," said Bob. "Ma likes to have fun with us, once in a -while."</p> - -<p>Sammy kept on until he stood in front of Bob's mother. Then he burst out -with:</p> - -<p>"What's that you said about a pirate, Mrs. Bouncer? Is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> there really one -at Lighthouse Cove? If there is I'm going to have a hunt for his gold. -Did he hide it in a cave, or bury it on the beach? And is there an old -map of it, drawn in blood?"</p> - -<p>Sammy Brown's eyes were shining with eagerness.</p> - -<p>"Oh, what a funny boy!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer, with a laugh. "I never -expected you would take me up so quickly."</p> - -<p>"Why, is it a joke, ma?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"I don't know whether it is or not," Mrs. Bouncer replied, and she did -not smile this time. "I really don't know why I mentioned it," she went -on. "It slipped out before I knew it."</p> - -<p>"Then there is really pirate gold there; is there?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, as to that I can't say. You see, boys, it's this way. I did not -intend to speak of it to you, Bob, until we got there, for I didn't want -any excitement. But, since it slipped from me, I'll tell you all I know.</p> - -<p>"When I went down to Lighthouse Cove, in the Spring, to see about hiring -a cottage for the Summer, I met an old sailor who had charge of some of -the places that were shut up for the Winter. After looking at several -cottages I picked out one named 'Barnacle.' It was a little too large, -but it was in an ideal spot, right in the centre of the cove shore. It -is lovely there, and near the lighthouse.</p> - -<p>"Well, I was talking to this old sailor, whose name is Hamp Salina, and -I asked him if Lighthouse Cove was a good place for a lively boy to have -fun—I was thinking of you, Bob."</p> - -<p>"What did he say?" asked Bob, eagerly.</p> - -<p>"Well, he said it was the finest spot a boy could wish for, and if -everything else failed to amuse him, he could spend his time digging for -the pirate gold. I asked him what he meant,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> and he said there was a -rumor that one of the old-time freebooters had come ashore at Lighthouse -Cove once, and buried part of his ill-gotten treasure there."</p> - -<p>"Did you ask him where it was buried?" asked Sammy, eagerly.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, but Hamp said he didn't know, and no one else did, though at -different times many persons had dug for the gold."</p> - -<p>"Did they find any?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Never, so the old sailor said. I'm sorry, now, that I mentioned it, for -you boys won't do anything else but look for it, I'm afraid."</p> - -<p>"We surely will have a try for it!" declared Sammy, earnestly.</p> - -<p>"That's what!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>"We'll have to get on the right side of Hamp Salina," said Frank. "Maybe -he knows more than he's told."</p> - -<p>"Well, don't count too much on it, and then you won't be disappointed," -advised Mrs. Bouncer, with a smile. "You'd best run along now, Frank and -Sammy, and see if your parents will let you come with Bob."</p> - -<p>"If my folks don't let me go," said Sammy, slowly, as he thought of the -chance of the pirate's treasure, "if they won't let me go, I—I won't go -with them. I'll stay here in Fairview all Summer."</p> - -<p>"And so will I!" cried Frank. "But I'm sure they'll let us."</p> - -<p>Frank proved to be a good prophet. When Mrs. Haven and Mrs. Brown had -read the notes written by Mrs. Bouncer, inviting the boys to Barnacle -Cottage, they at once gave their consents. As Mrs. Brown said to Mrs. -Haven:</p> - -<p>"We'd never have any peace with our boys if they were alone with us, at -the places to which we are going. They'd much better be together."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span></p><p>"I think so, too," said Mrs. Haven.</p> - -<p>So it was arranged, and Sammy and Frank were wild with delight.</p> - -<p>"I can go!" shouted Sammy, as he came rushing out of the house, after -his mother had consented. "I can go, Bob!"</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i021.jpg" alt="I can go, shouted Sammy" /></div> - -<p class="bold">"I can go," shouted Sammy.</p> - -<p>"That's fine!"</p> - -<p>"And we'll get that pirate gold!" added Frank, with a grin as he came -out of his house to give the good news that he, too, could go.</p> - -<p>"We'll, if we don't, we'll have fun anyhow," said Bob, who never had -much faith in the wild plans of Sammy Brown.</p> - -<p>"Oh, we'll get it!" declared Sammy. "All we need to do is to discover -the right place and dig."</p> - -<p>"Yes, discover it the way you discovered the treasure on Eagle -Mountain!" laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, something came of that!" declared Sammy, in some confusion.</p> - -<p>"Yes, something," admitted Bob, "but not what you expected. Now let's -begin packing."</p> - -<p>It was some days yet before the journey to Lighthouse Cove would be -made, but the boys were so eager that they began to get ready at once.</p> - -<p>Finally they did start. It was half a day's journey from Fairview to the -seashore, and Lighthouse Cove was reached about three o'clock in the -afternoon.</p> - -<p>Mr. and Mrs. Bouncer, the servants, and the three boys drove up from the -station in a large carriage.</p> - -<p>"There's the cottage!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer, pointing to a large one a -little way up from the beach of the cove. "Yes, and there's old Hamp to -welcome us."</p> - -<p>"What, the sailor who knows about the pirate gold?" cried Sammy. "I must -see him at once!" And, without waiting for the carriage to stop, he gave -a flying leap out of it.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER III</span> <span class="smaller">SAMMY GETS A CLUE</span></h2> - -<p>"What a boy!" cried Mr. Bouncer, in dismay.</p> - -<p>"He'll be hurt! Stop the carriage!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer.</p> - -<p>"Not a bit of it, ma'am!" grunted the old man who was driving the -horses. "Boys never get hurt. They always land on their feet, like cats, -ma'am. He's all right—there he goes," he added, looking over the side -of the carriage.</p> - -<p>He had, however, pulled up the horses, who came to a stop. Then Mr. and -Mrs. Bouncer could see that Sammy was indeed all right. He was running -across the sand toward an aged man who was seated on an overturned boat, -not far from the Bouncer Cottage.</p> - -<p>"Is that the sailor who told you about the pirate gold?" Bob wanted to -know.</p> - -<p>"Yes," said his mother, "but——"</p> - -<p>"Come on!" cried Bob to Frank. "We can't let Sammy get ahead of us on -this. May we go, Mother?"</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, I suppose so," she sighed, with a look at her husband, who -smiled and nodded. "We can unpack better if you boys are out of the -house, anyhow," she added. "But don't be gone too long."</p> - -<p>"Only long enough to find out about the pirate treasure," answered Bob, -as he and Frank got out of the carriage to run after Sammy, who was -already close to the old sailor.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span></p><p>"Wait—wait for us!" called Bob to his chum, and though Sammy was in a -great hurry, he felt that, as he was the guest of Bob, it would be no -more than polite to halt until he and Frank came up. Then, together, the -three chums approached the old sailor, who was sitting calmly on the -overturned boat, smoking a short pipe.</p> - -<p>"Good-afternoon," greeted Bob.</p> - -<p>"Arternoon!" mumbled the old man. "Are you the Bouncer boys?" he asked, -turning to look at the carriage, that was drawing up at Barnacle -Cottage.</p> - -<p>"I'm one of 'em," answered Bob. "These are my chums."</p> - -<p>"Hum! I thought your mother said, when she come down to rent that -cottage, that she had three boys."</p> - -<p>"Oh, she says that because we're always together," explained Frank. "My -mother says the same thing."</p> - -<p>"Hum!" mused the old sailor. "Well, I'm glad to see you. I likes young -people—'specially boys. They make a place a bit lively, and it's dull -enough here all Winter. In Summer the cottagers come, and then it ain't -so bad. I used to be a sailor but now I fish and rent boats," he went -on, "and if you're going to hire one for the season I'll let you have a -good one."</p> - -<p>"Oh, we'll be sure to want a boat," Bob said, "but I guess my father -will pick it out."</p> - -<p>Sammy, by nods and winks, had been trying to signal to Bob to ask some -questions about the treasure, and Bob, knowing that Sammy was anxious to -hear what there was in the story, said:</p> - -<p>"My friend here, Sammy Brown, wants to ask you some questions, Mr. -Salina."</p> - -<p>"Fire away!" invited the old fisherman. "I've got a little time yet -'fore I go treading for clams. What is it?"</p> - -<p>"About the pirate treasure!" exclaimed Sammy, eagerly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> "Mrs. Bouncer -said you told her about it. Where is it—we'd like to dig for it!"</p> - -<p>The old man did not answer for a few seconds. He was too busily engaged -in chuckling silently. He chuckled so hard that he took a wrong breath -on his pipe, some smoke went down his throat, and he coughed and -spluttered so wildly that the boys thought he was having a fit. But -finally he regained control of his breathing, though he was rather red -in the face, and there were tears in his eyes.</p> - -<p>"Excuse me," he said. "Excuse me, boys. I didn't mean to be impolite, -but I'm sorry you took so much stock in that pirate treasure yarn."</p> - -<p>"Isn't there any?" asked Sammy, in disappointed tones.</p> - -<p>"Well, there is and there isn't," said the old sailor. "That is to say -there's a <i>story</i> all right enough, but as to there being any <i>treasure</i> -I don't know. Nobody does, for sure, I guess."</p> - -<p>"Will you tell us about it?" pleaded Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes, go ahead," urged Frank. "That's the only way we'll have any -peace—to get it out of Sammy's system as soon as we can."</p> - -<p>"Huh! I guess you're as anxious as I am!" exclaimed Sammy. "Go ahead, -please," he added, to the sailor.</p> - -<p>"Well, I don't mind spinning the yarn for you," was the answer. "It -won't take long. The story's been going the rounds of this beach ever -since I can remember. To sum it all up, some of the old-timers claim -that a good many years ago a pirate ship was wrecked here."</p> - -<p>"Right here?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Well, out where you see them rocks," spoke the sailor, pointing with -the stem of his pipe. "There wasn't any lighthouse in them days, and you -wouldn't know the rocks were there, especially at high tide, when -they're covered.</p> - -<p>"Anyhow there was a ship wrecked on 'em. That part's<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> true enough, for -you can see what's left of her now, at low tide. But whether she was a -pirate craft, or not, I won't undertake to say.</p> - -<p>"But the story is that when the crew found they couldn't get the ship -off the rocks, they took to the boats and came ashore, bringing their -booty with 'em. What the booty was the story differs on. One yarn is -that it was gold, another says silver, and a third diamonds. You can -take your choice," and the old sailor chuckled, but this time he was -careful not to swallow any smoke.</p> - -<p>"I'll take diamonds," said Bob, with a snicker.</p> - -<p>"Oh, please go on," urged Sammy, eagerly, and the sailor resumed.</p> - -<p>"The story goes," he went on, "that the pirate crew, having lost their -ship, buried the treasure, and went looking for another vessel. But they -never got one. They had been trying to escape from a man-o'-war when -they ran upon the rocks, and the government ship traced 'em here. The -marines came ashore, soon after the pirates landed, and attacked 'em. -That was the end of the pirates."</p> - -<p>The old sailor paused, and lighted his pipe, which had gone out.</p> - -<p>"Is—is that all?" asked Sammy, and his voice showed his disappointment.</p> - -<p>"That's all," answered the sailor, solemnly.</p> - -<p>"But what became of the pirate treasure?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Nobody knows. It may be buried here, or the marines may have got it. My -own opinion is there never was any treasure. But lots of folks says -there was."</p> - -<p>"And if there was any, where would it be?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, 'most anywhere around here," answered Mr. Salina, with a wave of -his arm that took in the whole of the Cove. "You can start in and dig -where you like," he chuckled.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> "Nobody'll stop you. In fact there's been -a good many folks, off and on, digging around here, for quite a few -years back."</p> - -<p>"Did any of 'em ever find anything?" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Nary a one," laughed the old sailor. "It's all left for you boys to -find."</p> - -<p>"Well, maybe we can, after all," said Sammy, as he saw his chums looking -at him and smiling. "I'm going to have a try, anyhow."</p> - -<p>"It will take more than one Summer to dig all over this place," spoke -Bob. "And it will spoil all our other fun. I want to have some swimming, -boating and crabbing. You can have all the treasure you get, Sammy."</p> - -<p>Sammy did not reply. He was looking toward the rocks, where, according -to the story, the pirate vessel had been wrecked. Then he turned his -gaze toward the shore, and looked up and down the beach. Was there a -treasure buried in it? He hoped so. Yet he had been deceived so many -times before!</p> - -<p>"Come boys!" called Mrs. Bouncer, from the porch of the cottage. "I want -you to go to the store for some things for supper. Then, too, I want to -plan your sleeping rooms."</p> - -<p>"We'll see you again," said Sammy, to the old sailor. "Maybe you can -pick out the best spots for us to dig for the treasure."</p> - -<p>"Not me!" exclaimed the old man, quickly and sharply. "I won't have -anything to do with it. In the first place pirate gold is unlucky, and -in the second place I've seen too many folks let their business go to -rack and ruin spending their time looking for this treasure. I won't -have anything to do with it."</p> - -<p>Sammy looked a bit uncomfortable, and the old sailor, seeing this, -hastened to add:</p> - -<p>"But that needn't stop you from searching for the treasure<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span>—if there is -any. Dig as much as you like, only don't ask me to be responsible. You -ask your father about hiring a boat off me," he added to Bob. "I makes -my living—such as it is—that way—that and clamming and crabbing. It's -a hard way to earn money, but it's more sure than looking for pirate -gold," and he laughed.</p> - -<p>The boys raced to the cottage, where Mrs. Bouncer waited for them. The -three chums gave a hasty look about the place, and voted that it was the -finest spot for a Summer vacation they had ever seen. It was but a few -steps to the water, and they could put on their bathing suits in the -house, and run down the beach for a dip.</p> - -<p>Inside the cottage Mr. Bouncer and the two servants were unpacking -trunks, and getting out garments and bedding. Mrs. Bouncer gave to Bob a -list of the things she wanted from the store. The house was only a short -distance to the village, and the three boys walked along the beach to a -road that led to the town, where the stores were.</p> - -<p>"Well, what do you think of it now?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Think of what?" inquired Frank.</p> - -<p>"The treasure."</p> - -<p>Frank winked, and glanced at Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I know what you mean," put in Sammy, quickly. "You think it's all a -joke. But I may show you fellows yet that it isn't."</p> - -<p>"I wish you would!" exclaimed Bob. "I'd like a little loose gold -myself."</p> - -<p>There were busy times at Barnacle Cottage for the next few days. Getting -settled took most of the time of Mr. and Mrs. Bouncer, and then Bob's -father had to go back to Fairview to work. He would come down, however, -for week-ends.</p> - -<p>Bob and his mother, with the two boy chums, soon began to enjoy life at -the shore. A large, safe rowboat had been hired<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span> from the old sailor, -and the boys were learning how to use it properly, under the instruction -of Mr. Salina. Later on he promised to take them with him when he went -fishing and clamming.</p> - -<p>To get hard clams the old man would go in the shallow parts of -Lighthouse Cove, and, with his bare feet, would tread in the mud until -he felt a hard clam. Then he would work it on top of his foot, raise it -out of the water and reach it in his hand, tossing it into his boat.</p> - -<p>Soft clams he dug for on the exposed mud flats when the tide was low.</p> - -<p>The boys themselves learned to catch crabs, dangling pieces of meat on -the end of strings from the dock near the cottage. When a crab grasped -the meat in his claws the boys would pull gently on the string, until -the crab was near the surface of the water. Then they would slip a net -under him and lift him into a basket, wiggling and clashing his claws.</p> - -<p>The Fairview Boys made inquiries about the pirate treasure story told to -them by the old man, and found that it was generally known. Few persons -believed it, however, though, in times past, many had dug in different -places for the supposed gold.</p> - -<p>The boys had been at Lighthouse Cove for about a week now. They had -boated, bathed and crabbed, and one night, after supper, Bob said:</p> - -<p>"Fellows, it's about time we took in the lighthouse. I want to see how -the lantern works."</p> - -<p>"So do I!" exclaimed Frank. "I was asking Mr. Salina about it. He said -an old shipmate of his kept the light, and he'd take us through any time -we wanted to go."</p> - -<p>"Let's go over now," suggested Sammy. "It will be more fun to see it -lighted up."</p> - -<p>Frank and Bob agreed with this, and as Mrs. Bouncer had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> no objections, -the three of them started down the beach toward the lighthouse, which -was built on a little point of land, jutting out into the Cove.</p> - -<p>It was just getting dusk, and the rays of the light shone out brightly. -Sammy Brown, who was walking on a little ahead of his chums, suddenly -came to a stop, in a lonely place.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter—crab get you?" asked Bob, with a chuckle.</p> - -<p>"No. Hush!" whispered Sammy.</p> - -<p>"What's up now?" asked Frank. "See some of those pirates?"</p> - -<p>Sammy turned and came back to his chums.</p> - -<p>"Easy!" he cautioned. "Fellows, I think I have a clue! Come over here, -but don't make any noise."</p> - -<p>He led them to a clump of bushes beside the path. Cautiously parting the -leaves, to make an opening, Sammy looked through. Then he drew back his -head.</p> - -<p>"Yes, he's there yet!" he whispered. "Take a look."</p> - -<p>"Who is it?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Someone digging for pirate gold!" whispered Sammy, hoarsely.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER IV</span> <span class="smaller">IN THE LIGHTHOUSE</span></h2> - -<p>For a moment Sammy's two chums looked curiously at him, and Frank seemed -about to laugh. Then Bob said:</p> - -<p>"You're crazy, Sammy!"</p> - -<p>"I am not," answered the other, quickly. "Look there!" All looked, and -did indeed see a man using a spade to dig up the earth in a secluded -spot not far from the path that led to the lighthouse. The man, who was -elderly, had a lantern on the ground beside him, and as he sunk the -spade into the earth, and brought it up, he would look closely at the -soil in the rays of the light.</p> - -<p>"Now what do you think?" demanded Sammy, in a triumphant whisper. "Isn't -he digging all right?"</p> - -<p>"Oh, he's digging," agreed Bob. "I admit that."</p> - -<p>"And for gold!" added Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Gold nothing!" exclaimed Frank with a quiet laugh. "Do you want to know -what I think, Sammy Brown?"</p> - -<p>"Yes; what is it?"</p> - -<p>"I think that man—whoever he is—is after fish worms. See, he has a tin -can there, ready to put the worms in. That's all he's doing, Sammy. He's -after bait, getting ready for a fishing trip late to-night or early -to-morrow morning."</p> - -<p>"That's right," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, is it?" asked Sammy, and he did not seem at all disturbed by what -his chums said. Then he quietly asked them:</p> - -<p>"Did you fellows ever hear of catching salt-water fish on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span> angle worms? -I guess not—not around here, anyhow. Wasn't that what old Hamp Salina -told us, when we asked him about bait the other day?"</p> - -<p>"That's so," agreed Frank. "They don't use angle worms around here."</p> - -<p>"No, but they use blood worms," declared Bob, "and you have to dig for -them."</p> - -<p>"Yes, down on the beach, but not up as far as this from the water," -spoke Sammy earnestly, and the boys knew that he was right. Still the -man with the lantern was digging for something, and he seemed very much -in earnest about it, too.</p> - -<p>The boys watched him for a minute or so in silence. They had spoken in -whispers so far, and the digger had evidently not heard or seen them. He -was too busy using his shovel.</p> - -<p>Presently Frank spoke.</p> - -<p>"Say, fellows!" he exclaimed, "maybe he isn't digging for anything after -all."</p> - -<p>"Pooh! Can't we see?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"No, I mean he may be <i>burying</i> something, instead of digging it up. -He's making quite a hole."</p> - -<p>That was something new to think about, and for a few seconds the boys -watched to see if Frank's idea was right.</p> - -<p>"Do you think he's one of the pirates?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Maybe—if there are any—but I don't believe so," answered Frank.</p> - -<p>"Perhaps he found some of the pirate gold, and he's burying it again -until he has a good chance to get rid of it. I wish we knew who he was."</p> - -<p>At that moment the old man straightened up his bent back, and gave a -sigh of relief, and also disappointment.</p> - -<p>"Well," the boys heard him murmur, "I'll have to dig farther on. It -isn't here, that's sure. I wonder if I will ever find it?"</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span></p><p>The words seemed to strike a thrill through the Fairview boys. They -looked at each other in the darkness, illuminated by the flashes of -light from the lighthouse beacon, and then, as the old man picked up his -lantern, and turned in their direction, they crouched down in the bushes -in order to remain hidden.</p> - -<p>But the night-digger, whoever he was, looked neither to left nor right. -He turned sharply and walked away from the boys. Then they breathed more -easily.</p> - -<p>"I thought sure he'd see us," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"So did I," added Bob.</p> - -<p>"Let's take a look and see what he was after," suggested Sammy. "Maybe -we can get another clue."</p> - -<p>He was quite excited, and so were his two chums. Usually the others did -not pay much attention to some of the queer things Sammy said and -thought, but this time it seemed as though he had stumbled on a mystery. -Still Frank was not going to give in too easily. He had not forgotten -how Sammy's "counterfeiters" had turned out.</p> - -<p>"I believe, after all," said Frank, "that this man will prove to be only -someone looking for a place to bury a dead cat, or something like that."</p> - -<p>"Oh, you get out!" exclaimed Sammy. "You're always making fun of my -ideas. Didn't you hear him say that he couldn't find it? It means the -pirate gold, I'm sure. Then he said he'd have to look farther. Does that -look like he was burying a dead cat?"</p> - -<p>"No, it doesn't," admitted Bob. "But let's go on to the lighthouse, and -maybe the keeper there may know something about this old man. We'll ask -him, and if he doesn't, perhaps Mr. Salina will."</p> - -<p>"I say—hold on!" cried Sammy, as his two chums set off down the path -again.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span></p><p>"What's the matter now?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Do you see the old man digging again?" inquired Bob.</p> - -<p>"No," replied Sammy, "but don't let's tell the light-keeper nor Mr. -Salina what we saw. Let's work this thing out ourselves. If there's any -money in it we don't want to have to share it among too many people."</p> - -<p>"Oh, you're always thinking of that!" laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"And another thing," said Frank. "Suppose that old man finds the pirate -gold, Sammy, we couldn't ask him for a share in it, just because we -spied on him, and saw him dig it, could we?"</p> - -<p>"No," answered Sammy slowly, as he scratched his nose, which he always -did when he was thinking deeply. "No, I s'pose not. But if we saw the -old man digging, and he didn't find anything, there's nothing to prevent -our going and digging near the same spots. He probably knows <i>about</i> -where the gold is hid.</p> - -<p>"But if we talk about this, and tell everybody, they'll all dig too, and -they may find the treasure ahead of us."</p> - -<p>"Say, you're as bad as when we went to Eagle Mountain," laughed Bob. -"But go ahead. Have your way. We won't say anything until we've done a -little more watching."</p> - -<p>"That's all I ask," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Then come on to the lighthouse," suggested Bob. "I'd like to see how -the machinery works."</p> - -<p>A little later they were knocking on the door of the small cottage built -at the side of the big tower, in the top of which flashed the warning -beacon.</p> - -<p>"Come in," called a girl's voice, and the boys entered. They found -themselves in a pleasant room, where sat John Floyd, the keeper of the -light, and his wife and daughter. It was evidently the daughter, a girl -of about twelve years,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> who had invited the boys to enter, for she rose -to welcome them, saying:</p> - -<p>"I think I know you—Mr. Salina told me about you, and said you might -come over to see us. Father, these are the boys from Barnacle Cottage. -This is my mother and father," she went on, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"I hope you don't mind us calling," spoke Bob. "Mr. Salina said visitors -were allowed, and we wanted to see how the light worked."</p> - -<p>"Glad to have you!" exclaimed Mr. Floyd, who was proud of his light. -"And night is the best time to come to see the machinery working. Now -let me get the straight of you—what are your names?"</p> - -<p>The boys introduced themselves, and learned that the daughter's name was -Lucy. She offered to take them through the tower, and led the way to the -spiral stairs.</p> - -<p>"Our light isn't a very big one," she said, "but it shows the ships -where the dangerous rocks are, and I suppose that's all that is needed."</p> - -<p>"Does it work by electricity?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"No, it's an oil light," answered Lucy. "And father has to work all -night to keep it trimmed and bright, and to see that the oil does not -give out."</p> - -<p>"It must be hard work," ventured Sammy.</p> - -<p>"It is, but father is used to it now, and likes it. He sleeps most of -the day, and stays up all night. Sometimes mother and I take the early -watches of the night to give him a rest."</p> - -<p>"Do you have bad storms here?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, indeed, sometimes. And then father always worries for fear the -light may go out. If it did, even for a few minutes, some ship might -take the wrong course and get on the rocks. Of course the big ships -don't come up in our cove, but small ones do."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span></p><p>"Has that ever happened that the light went out?" Frank asked.</p> - -<p>"Not since father has been in charge," said Lucy proudly, "and that is -over fourteen years, now. He came here when he was first married, and -has been here ever since."</p> - -<p>"What is this for?" asked Bob, as they passed a curious bit of machinery -in the tower, on their way up to the lamp itself.</p> - -<p>"That is what turns the lenses," the girl explained. "You see this is a -revolving light. It flashes around once every two seconds, and it is -regulated by clock-work. This big weight that hangs down is used instead -of a spring or an engine, to turn the lenses."</p> - -<p>"I see!" exclaimed Sammy. "It's like a cuckoo clock."</p> - -<p>"Yes," answered Lucy. "Father winds the weight up every day, by a crank -and windlass, as in an old-fashioned well. Then it is caught by a sort -of trigger. At night when the lantern is lighted, the weight is allowed -to slide slowly down. That pulls the wheels around and the light -flashes.</p> - -<p>"You see each lighthouse in this section has a different sort of -lantern. That is, some are fixed lights, some are revolving lights, some -are red and some are white. Sailors can tell, by the difference in the -lights, just where they are, even on the darkest night."</p> - -<p>"A lighthouse is quite important," murmured Frank.</p> - -<p>"We think so," laughed Lucy.</p> - -<p>Then the girl took them up into the light chamber itself, a small room, -with glass sides. The glass was really in the shape of lenses, as in an -automobile lamp, only it was cut in another form, called a prism, in -order to better cast out the direct rays, and magnify them.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i037.jpg" alt="Then the girl took them up in the light chamber itself" /></div> - -<p class="bold">Then the girl took them up in the light chamber itself.</p> - -<p>The lantern was an oil one, and it burned brightly, for it was kept -clean, and the wicks were often trimmed. The boys<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> were rather surprised -to find that it was the glass windows, or prisms, that revolved by means -of the clockwork, and not the lantern itself. If the lantern went around -it could not be trimmed without being stopped, and this would make a -difference in the flashes, Lucy explained, and so confuse the sailors.</p> - -<p>At certain places in the glass sides of the lantern room, there were -blank spaces where no light could flash out, and this gave the proper -signal for that part of the coast.</p> - -<p>If you will take a pasteboard tube, such as calenders are mailed in, cut -two or three holes near the top, making the holes the same distance -apart, with blank spaces in between, and set this tube over a candle, -you will have a good idea of a lighthouse. Then if you will turn the -tube around, with the lighted candle still inside, you will get the -effect of a flashing light, such as Bob and his chums were shown.</p> - -<p>They were much interested, and stayed in the tower some time, watching -Mr. Floyd trim and fill the lamp, to keep it bright.</p> - -<p>"This is certainly great!" exclaimed Frank, when they were ready to -leave.</p> - -<p>"It sure is," agreed Sammy. Then he was unable to restrain his curiosity -in spite of what he had agreed with his chums. "Say," he asked -earnestly, when they were down in the living-room again, "did you ever -hear anything of the pirate gold buried around here, Mr. Floyd?"</p> - -<p>The light-keeper laughed.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, I've heard," he said, "but I don't take any stock in it."</p> - -<p>Sammy was not discouraged by this answer.</p> - -<p>"Did you ever dig for it?" he persisted.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, when I first came here, and heard the story, I was young and -foolish, and I had my try at it," answered the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> light-keeper, with a -chuckle. "But I soon gave it up. I could make more money, and be sure of -it, by tending the light."</p> - -<p>"Does anybody ever dig for it now?" asked Frank, giving Sammy a meaning -look.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, now and then someone has a try at it," went on Mr. Floyd. -"They think they can discover some new clues, I suppose. But I don't -take any stock in 'em. Well, boys, come again—always glad to see you," -he added, as they went out.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER V</span> <span class="smaller">THE DARK BEACON</span></h2> - -<p>"Well, what do you think now, Sammy?" asked Bob, as they walked toward -Barnacle Cottage in the evening darkness.</p> - -<p>"What about?" asked Sammy, sharply.</p> - -<p>"About your treasure."</p> - -<p>"I think just the same as I did before," answered Sammy, promptly, "and -that is that it's around here. Didn't we see that man digging for it?"</p> - -<p>"Say, you'd believe the moon was made of green cheese if someone told -you," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I would; eh?" returned Sammy. "Well, you just wait and see."</p> - -<p>The days that followed were happy ones for the Fairview boys. They went -in swimming so often that Mrs. Bouncer said they might as well live in -their bathing suits, and save their other clothes. They often went -clamming, bringing home big baskets filled with the soft kind.</p> - -<p>These clams were steamed, or made into toothsome chowder, which the boys -enjoyed very much.</p> - -<p>At other times the lads would take their own safe boat, and go to the -distant sand flats, where they learned to tread for hard clams.</p> - -<p>Crabbing was one of their chief delights, and many a basketfull of the -clashing, clawing creatures they pulled out<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> of the waters of Lighthouse -Cove. Sometimes they would get soft crabs, by hauling the seine, or -straight net, along shore.</p> - -<p>But, though they made many inquiries, or, rather, though Sammy did, he -could not find out who the old man was whom they had seen digging by -lantern-light. They had had a fairly good view of him, but in the Cove -settlement were many old fishermen and sailors, who looked much the same -as that elderly man did, so they were not sure which of the many -villagers he might have been; and they did not like to ask.</p> - -<p>One day, after the three chums had been rowing for some distance around -the Cove, Sammy Brown suddenly exclaimed:</p> - -<p>"I say, fellows, I've got an idea!"</p> - -<p>"What, another one?" laughed Bob. "You're full of them lately."</p> - -<p>"Let's hear it, anyhow," suggested Frank. "Can we have any fun by it, -Sammy?"</p> - -<p>"Sure. What do you say to rowing ashore, and digging a pirate cave."</p> - -<p>"You mean dig a cave and look for the pirate gold?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, I mean let's play we're pirates ourselves. We can go over to one of -those sand dunes, and hollow out a hole in the side of it. We can make -believe that's where we live, and we can make a fire of driftwood."</p> - -<p>"Say, that'll be great!" cried Bob. "And we can bring some grub there -and cook it! Sammy, you're all right!"</p> - -<p>"Even if he can't find the pirate gold!" added Frank, gaily.</p> - -<p>Filled with the new idea, the boys hastily rowed up on shore, and soon -were digging into the side of the hill of sand, making a place where -they could go in and imagine all sorts of delightful things.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span></p><p>The sand dune was one of many along the shore, and on top grew some -rank grass that held the sand together. Working with broad pieces of -driftwood for shovels, the boys soon had quite a hole in the sand pile. -It was large enough to hold all three of them, and they were eagerly -talking of the fun they would have.</p> - -<p>"We can come over here and stay all night!" said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Sure, it will be plenty warm enough, with a blanket or two," added -Sammy.</p> - -<p>"And we can cook our meals right on the beach, in front of the cave," -added Frank. "That's the way the pirates used to do."</p> - -<p>"Then we'd better get some driftwood for the fire," suggested Sammy. -"We've got the hole almost large enough."</p> - -<p>They collected quite a pile of the wood that was strewn along the beach, -and then, after sitting in the "pirate cave" for a while, they rowed -back to Barnacle Cottage, to get some food which they intended to cook -over their campfire that evening.</p> - -<p>After some objection, Mrs. Bouncer said the boys might cook a meal -there, but she would not let them sleep all night in the sand cave.</p> - -<p>"It's sure to be damp," she said, "and, though you boys might not think -so, I can't have you catching colds. Play there in the daytime as much -as you like, but you can't sleep there."</p> - -<p>With this they had to be content. They had lots of fun building the -fire, and toasting frankforters over the coals. Sometimes the sausages -would drop off the pointed sticks, and fall into the ashes, but Bob and -his chums brushed the dirt off and went on eating as if nothing had -happened.</p> - -<p>They played in the cave for several days, and some of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> other boys -from nearby cottages joined with them, so the three chums became the -leaders of a regular "pirate band."</p> - -<p>One afternoon, however, something happened that put a stop to this fun. -Sammy and his two chums had gone alone to the cave, and they had taken -with them shovels to enlarge it, as it was getting too crowded on -account of so many boys wanting to enter it.</p> - -<p>"We'll make a dandy big cave, while we're at it!" boasted Sammy.</p> - -<p>The three chums dug away for some time, and finally Bob said:</p> - -<p>"That's enough, fellows. If we go too far back, and the sand should cave -in, we'd never get out."</p> - -<p>"That's right," chimed in Frank.</p> - -<p>"Pooh! You fellows are scared!" exclaimed Sammy. "I'm going to dig it -farther back. You two get some driftwood, and pile it out in front. -We'll have a roaring big fire to-night."</p> - -<p>Frank and Bob went up and down the beach, gathering sticks, and bits of -broken boards, while Sammy continued to dig away inside the cave. Frank -and Bob made several trips to and fro, and the pile of wood was growing.</p> - -<p>Finally, as they neared the cave, on what they said would be their last -trip, as they were tired, Frank cried:</p> - -<p>"Look! The sand has caved in!"</p> - -<p>"So it has!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>They looked toward where the mouth of the cave had been. It was closed, -and the sand was still sliding somewhat, showing that the accident must -have happened only a little while before.</p> - -<p>"And Sam—Sammy!" gasped Bob.</p> - -<p>"He's in there!" faltered Frank.</p> - -<p>"And we've got to get him out—quick!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span></p><p>They both glanced up and down the beach. No one was in sight. -Fortunately they had brought their shovels out of the cave.</p> - -<p>With these they began digging at what had been the entrance to the -"pirate" cavern. Shovelful after shovelful of sand they tossed aside, -until their arms ached, but they would not stop.</p> - -<p>"We must get him out!" gasped Bob.</p> - -<p>"Before he smothers!" added Frank.</p> - -<p>They worked with a will. Luckily for Sammy, he had been coming out of -the cave when the accident happened. Otherwise he would have been so far -back that he might never have been gotten out alive.</p> - -<p>As it was Frank and Bob had dug for only a few seconds before they saw a -hand moving about in the sand. Then another hand appeared beside it, and -they stopped digging.</p> - -<p>"There he is!" cried Bob, joyfully.</p> - -<p>"And he's alive!" said Frank. "Use your fingers—not your shovel—we -might hurt him."</p> - -<p>With their hands they now scooped away the sand, and in a few seconds -Sammy's face appeared. He was gasping for breath, and looked quite pale -and frightened, but with the help of his chums he was soon completely -uncovered.</p> - -<p>"Are you all right?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"I—I guess so," answered Sammy, shaking the sand from his clothes, and -feeling all over himself to make sure. "Yes," he went on. "Nothing's -busted."</p> - -<p>"How did it happen?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"I don't know. All of a sudden the sand began to slide. I got scared and -ran for the front of the cave. Then the front door went shut, you might -say, and I was caught. I held my breath, made a little place for my -mouth and nose, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> waited. I knew you fellows would get me out, and -you did."</p> - -<p>"We were scared, though," confessed Bob.</p> - -<p>"I guess we won't go in any more sand caves," said Frank. And they did -not. It was a lucky escape for Sammy, and Mrs. Bouncer, when she heard -about it, made strong objections to the boys playing pirates in that -fashion.</p> - -<p>But there were plenty of other chances for the chums of Barnacle Cottage -to have good times, and they enjoyed their stay at Lighthouse Cove to -the utmost.</p> - -<p>Sammy still persisted in believing that pirate gold was buried somewhere -about, and he dug in many places, when he could slip away from his -chums, but without success. He kept a lookout for the man with the -lantern, but could not meet him, as far as he could tell, though he saw -many whom he thought was the person he sought. Nor did he make any -inquiries for fear of being laughed at.</p> - -<p>One evening, about a week after Sammy had been caught in the "pirate -cave," he proposed, after supper, that he and his chums pay another -visit to the lighthouse. He had taken some pictures of it with his -camera, and wanted to show them to Lucy and her parents.</p> - -<p>"All right, I'm with you," said Frank, and Bob nodded to show that he -would go, too.</p> - -<p>They saw the light flashing, as they started from the cottage, and -struck across the now lonely beach. The rays of light came every so -often, flashing over their heads, and out toward the inlet, where the -sea and cove met.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, as they walked along, Bob glanced up and exclaimed:</p> - -<p>"See! The light has gone out!"</p> - -<p>They all looked up.</p> - -<p>"So it has!" faltered Frank.</p> - -<p>"The lighthouse is dark!" said Sammy slowly. "Fellows,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> it must be -wreckers at work! They've overpowered the light-keeper, and put out the -light to draw some ship in toward shore so she'll be wrecked! That's -what it is—wreckers! Come on!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER VI</span> <span class="smaller">JUST IN TIME</span></h2> - -<p>For a moment Bob and Frank were so startled at not seeing the light -flashing out, as it always did after sunset, that they did not stop to -think what Sammy's excited words meant. They raced on after him, toward -the entrance to the lighthouse, intent only on finding out what was the -matter.</p> - -<p>"It sure is wreckers," Sammy kept saying over and over again. "Some bad -men are trying to get the ship on the rocks, and when she breaks up -they'll get all the valuable cargo that comes ashore!"</p> - -<p>Then Frank paid some attention to what his chum was saying.</p> - -<p>"Hold on there!" he cried. "That's some more of your wild imagination, -Sammy."</p> - -<p>"Wreckers! Who ever heard of wreckers?" Bob wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"I did!" exclaimed Sammy. "I'm sure they've put out the light!"</p> - -<p>"How could they?" asked Bob. "Mr. Floyd has been there all the while."</p> - -<p>"They—they overpowered him," said Sammy, hesitating a bit over the long -word.</p> - -<p>"Well, what about his wife and daughter?" Frank wanted to know. "I guess -they wouldn't let any wreckers put out the light."</p> - -<p>"Mrs. Floyd and Lucy are away this evening," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> Sammy. "I saw them go -past our cottage. They said they were going to the moving picture show -over in town, and would stay all night with some relations. It's all a -plot—that's what it is! The wreckers knew Mr. Floyd would be alone."</p> - -<p>Bob and Frank looked at Sammy a little differently now. It was true that -the wife and daughter of the light-keeper had gone away. The two chums -remembered this, now that Sammy had recalled it to their mind. The -keeper was alone in the tower.</p> - -<p>And certainly something must have happened, for the light was out, and -as the boys raced toward it they glanced up, every now and then, hoping -to see the bright beams flashing. But the tower remained in darkness.</p> - -<p>As they ran on they saw a light flashing along the path ahead of them. -It swayed from side to side, and flickered so the boys easily guessed -that it was a lantern being carried by someone.</p> - -<p>"There they are now!" cried Sammy, in much excitement.</p> - -<p>"Who?" Bob wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"Some of the wreckers! They're making signals! Don't let them see us!"</p> - -<p>Frank and Bob hesitated. They did not know what to do, and, though they -knew that Sammy was much given to imagination, and to excitement, this -time he might be partly right, they thought.</p> - -<p>"What shall we do?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Let's get away from here," proposed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Come on—run!" advised Frank.</p> - -<p>"It's too late—they've seen us and they're coming right this way!" -exclaimed Bob. The person with the lantern, whoever he might be, was -headed directly for the boys, and coming on swiftly.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span></p><p>"Fellows, we can't run," called Sammy. "Whatever happens we've either -got to give the alarm about the light being out, or we've got to go to -the tower, see what's the matter, and start it ourselves. We've got to -stand our ground."</p> - -<p>"Maybe someone from the town will notice that the light's out, and come -over," suggested Frank, hopefully.</p> - -<p>"They can't see the light from the back, over in town," put in Sammy. -"You can only see it from in front, or at either side, the way we are -now. The back part of the light is always dark."</p> - -<p>"That's so," admitted Bob. "But what can we do? Who is this coming with -the lantern?"</p> - -<p>They did not have long to wait to find out, for the figure, with the -swinging light, was running now. The path was narrow and the boys -stepped to one side, slacking in their pace a little.</p> - -<p>Then, as the stranger with the lantern came opposite them, Sammy and his -chums gasped in astonishment.</p> - -<p>The person who ran past them, paying no more attention to the boys than -if he had not seen them, was an old man, and as he flashed by, Sammy -cried:</p> - -<p>"It's the same one—the man who was digging for the gold!"</p> - -<p>"So it was!" exclaimed Frank.</p> - -<p>"Let's take after him," suggested Bob. "Maybe he's seen the trouble at -the lighthouse and is going for help. Then we won't have to go. Let's -follow him!"</p> - -<p>"No, don't!" cried Sammy Brown, catching hold of Bob's coat.</p> - -<p>"Why not?"</p> - -<p>"Because it's dangerous!"</p> - -<p>"Dangerous? How?"</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p><p>"That man's one of the wreckers!" whispered Sammy, hoarsely. "He's just -been to the lighthouse to put out the lamp, and now he's going to join -his gang. We'd better not interfere with him."</p> - -<p>"Why, I thought you said he was looking for pirate gold!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Well, I guess I was mistaken," admitted Sammy. The boys had come to a -stop, and were looking after the man who was running away from them, his -lantern bobbing from side to side. "I'm sure he's a wrecker anyhow," -went on Sammy. "He looked like a desperate character!"</p> - -<p>"Say, I don't believe you know what you're talking about!" burst out -Frank. "Maybe that man has seen the trouble at the lighthouse, and has -gone for help. But, for all that, I think we'd better go there -ourselves, and see if we can do anything."</p> - -<p>"Maybe you're right," admitted Sammy, as he looked in the direction of -the bobbing lantern. "Anyhow I don't believe it would be a good thing to -follow that man. Say, we're getting as badly mixed up in a mystery here, -as we were on Pine Island."</p> - -<p>"Yes, and maybe it will turn out just as easy," spoke Frank.</p> - -<p>"No, I'm sure something is going to happen here," insisted Sammy. "The -light being out, for one thing, shows that, and the old man digging for -pirate gold is another. But come on, fellows. Some ship may go on the -rocks while we're talking here."</p> - -<p>"There's no storm, that's one good thing," murmured Bob. "I thought -wreckers only worked during a storm."</p> - -<p>"Maybe they do things different here," said Sammy. "Come on!"</p> - -<p>They started again toward the lighthouse, now and then looking up toward -the tall tower in the hope of seeing the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> flashing beacon. But all was -still darkness, save for the twinkling stars in the sky.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i053.jpg" alt="They started again toward the lighthouse" /></div> - -<p class="bold">They started again toward the lighthouse.</p> - -<p>They reached the cottage connected with the lighthouse. The door was -open, but all was dark inside. For a moment the boys hesitated. -Afterwards Bob and Frank admitted that they were thinking of the same -thing Sammy was—that perhaps there was a trap, and that the wreckers -were waiting for them.</p> - -<p>Finally Frank called:</p> - -<p>"Hello, Mr. Floyd! Are you there? What's the matter? Why isn't the light -going?"</p> - -<p>At first only a groaning voice answered them, and then they heard the -stronger tones of the light-keeper crying out:</p> - -<p>"Oh, thank Providence someone has come! Quick, boys, you're just in -time! Light the lamp! Never mind me! Light the lantern!"</p> - -<p>"Are you hurt?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Did the wreckers attack you?" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Wreckers! Good land, no!" shouted the light-keeper. "I fell down -stairs, and I guess my leg is broken. And when I fell I hit against the -lever that puts out the lantern, and that made it all dark. And I've -been lying here ever since, calling for help, but no one heard me. I -didn't know what to do, for I can't seem to move.</p> - -<p>"But you're just in time, boys. Come in, and I'll tell you how to light -the lantern. Hurry, or some ship may go on the rocks! Wreckers? Good -land, what made you think of them?"</p> - -<p>"Fooled again!" murmured Sammy Brown, as he and his companions entered -the cottage.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER VII</span> <span class="smaller">ON THE TRAIL</span></h2> - -<p>"Where are you?" called Bob to the light-keeper, as the boys went into -the living room. All was so dark they could see nothing.</p> - -<p>"Right here, at the foot of the stairs," answered Mr. Floyd. "I haven't -been able to move since my fall."</p> - -<p>"Are you badly hurt?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"I don't know, but I hope not. Never mind about me, though. You must set -the lantern going, for I can't do it. That is most important. I have -never yet let it go out—this is the first time; but I could not help -that."</p> - -<p>"Wait, I'll strike a match," said Sammy. "Then we can see what we are -doing."</p> - -<p>The tiny glow illuminated the room, and the boys could see the -light-keeper huddled in a heap at the foot of the stairs that led to the -tower, at the top of which was the big lantern.</p> - -<p>"There's a lamp on the table," said the aged man, pointing to it. "Light -that, and then go up to the lantern. Do you think you can light it?"</p> - -<p>"I guess so," answered Bob. "Your daughter showed us how it was done."</p> - -<p>"That's good. She little knew how soon you might have to do it. But if -you think you can't do it, you must go for help. My wife and daughter -have gone to visit relations, and will be away all night, but you can -get some of the fishermen; they will know how to light the lantern."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span></p><p>"Oh, I'm sure we can do it!" exclaimed Frank. "Lucy showed us just how -it was done."</p> - -<p>"I'm thankful for that," went on the light-keeper. "Now, boys, don't -bother with me!" he went on, as they advanced toward him. "Just get up -aloft and set the lantern going. You see I have an arrangement so I can -put it out from down here, without going all the way up. That's to save -me climbing the stairs in the morning.</p> - -<p>"Well, I was coming down, from having trimmed it, a little while ago, -when I slipped. I put out my hand to save myself, and, by mistake I -grabbed hold of the wire I had rigged up to put out the light. It put it -out, all right, and here I've lain ever since, not knowing what to do. -Oh, it was terrible!</p> - -<p>"I couldn't tell when anyone would come, being all alone as I was. I -called and called, but no one heard me."</p> - -<p>The boys thought of the strange figure of the old man, with the lantern, -running away, and they wondered if he had heard and had not heeded.</p> - -<p>"I couldn't tell what moment some ship might go on the rocks," continued -the light-keeper. "For the sailors, not seeing the light, might get off -their course. I was glad there was no storm, for that would have made it -much worse.</p> - -<p>"But never mind about that now. You're here, thank Providence, and you -can start the light going before it's too late."</p> - -<p>"Come on!" cried Bob, and with a lantern which they had found and set -aglow, to light them up the dark stairs of the tower, the three boys -ascended. First, however, they had in spite of his protests, made Mr. -Floyd more comfortable, by putting a pillow under his head, and -straightening him out. They did not want to move him too much for fear -one of his legs might be broken.</p> - -<p>Up into the lantern tower the lads went. Then with hands<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> that trembled -a little, they ignited the big wicks, first having raised the -extinguishers that Mr. Floyd had accidentally pulled down over them in -his fall.</p> - -<p>The machinery, that made the glass prisms turn, was still in motion, not -having been stopped since it was set going early in the evening, so with -this the boys had nothing to do. As soon as they had lighted the -lantern, the welcome flash went sparkling out over the waters of the -cove, to warn captains off the dangerous rocks.</p> - -<p>"And now we'd better get down and help Mr. Floyd," said Bob, when they -had made sure that the lantern was going all right, and would not smoke. -"I guess we'd better get a doctor."</p> - -<p>"I think so, too," added Frank. "Too bad about your wreckers, Sammy," he -went on, with a laugh.</p> - -<p>"Aw, quit your fooling!" exclaimed the lad who sometimes let his -imagination run away with him. "Something like that might have happened, -anyhow."</p> - -<p>"Yes, it <i>might</i>," admitted Bob. "But it <i>didn't</i>."</p> - -<p>"I'm sure there's something queer about that man with the lantern we -saw," continued Sammy. "He's after that pirate gold, I'm positive."</p> - -<p>"Well, he does act queer," admitted Frank. "We can have a try for his -secret, as soon as we get this lighthouse business fixed up."</p> - -<p>"We do seem to run into the queerest things," remarked Bob. "If it isn't -one thing it's another."</p> - -<p>"I like it!" exclaimed Sammy, who was always on the lookout for -something to happen. That it seldom did take place never discouraged -him.</p> - -<p>"Well, is everything all right?" asked Mr. Floyd, as the boys came down -stairs.</p> - -<p>"Yes," answered Frank. "The lantern is going all right."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span></p><p>"And now we'll look after you," went on Bob. "Are you badly hurt?"</p> - -<p>"I can't tell. Best have the doctor look me over, I guess. I'm more -comfortable since you boys came. It isn't so much for myself that I -care, but the light depends on me. Uncle Sam trusts me to keep it going, -no matter what happens, and I've got to do it. If I get knocked out -someone else will have to look after it."</p> - -<p>"We'll go for a doctor," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes, and maybe we'd better go tell your wife and daughter what has -happened," suggested Frank. "They'll want to be with you."</p> - -<p>"I guess that would be a good plan," agreed the light-keeper. "They -ought to be here, for I'm afraid I won't be able to get up and down -stairs much for a while."</p> - -<p>While the boys were planning who should stay at the lighthouse, and who -should go for the physician, hurried footsteps were heard outside, and a -number of fishermen and sailors came crowding in. They were much -surprised at what they saw.</p> - -<p>"Look here!" exclaimed one big lobsterman, "what's all this here about, -John Floyd?"</p> - -<p>"We saw the light out," added another, "and we made up a committee to -come and investigate."</p> - -<p>"Thinking there was trouble," put in a third.</p> - -<p>"Yes, thinking there was trouble," agreed the second speaker. "Has these -boys been up to any tricks?" and he looked at the three chums -suspiciously.</p> - -<p>"Indeed they have not!" exclaimed Mr. Floyd, earnestly. "If it hadn't -been for these boys the light would be out yet. And if you fellows had -come a little quicker, instead of waiting to form a committee, it might -have been better."</p> - -<p>"Well, we didn't notice, until a few minutes ago, that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> light wasn't -flashin'," said a clam dealer. "You know you can't see it very well from -shore. But Ted Knowlton was out in his boat after eels, and he noticed -right away that there wasn't any flash. So he rowed in as fast as he -could and told us."</p> - -<p>"But the boys got here first, and I'm mighty thankful to 'em!" exclaimed -Mr. Floyd. "Howsomever, now that you men are here, you might lift me up -on that lounge, and then get the doctor."</p> - -<p>"And we'll go for your wife!" said Bob. "We can do that, if you'll tell -us where she is."</p> - -<p>The light-keeper gave them the directions for finding Mrs. Floyd and -Lucy, who had gone to a relative about two miles away. The boys left, -after waiting to learn that, in the opinion of the fishermen, Mr. -Floyd's leg was only sprained, and not broken.</p> - -<p>Stopping at Barnacle Cottage to tell Mrs. Bouncer what had happened, and -where they were going, Bob and his chums hurried to where Mrs. Floyd was -staying. She and Lucy were at first much alarmed at the news, but were -soon told that nothing serious had happened. They at once returned to -the lighthouse with the boys.</p> - -<p>The keeper was feeling much better now, and the doctor had bandaged his -leg. He would be unable to walk around for several days, it was said, -and some of the fishermen agreed to come and help with the heavier work -about the lighthouse until Mr. Floyd was able to be about.</p> - -<p>"Well, that's over," remarked Bob, as he and his chums went back to -Barnacle Cottage again. "Quite some little excitement for a while; eh?"</p> - -<p>"That's right," agreed Frank.</p> - -<p>"But it isn't over yet," said Sammy Brown.</p> - -<p>"Why not?" asked Bob. "That is unless you're going to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> have a look for -the wreckers, Sammy," and he nudged Frank, to show that he was only -joking.</p> - -<p>"Humph! Wreckers, yes!" exclaimed Sammy. "If there <i>had</i> happened to be -any you fellows would have been glad enough to want part of the credit. -But as long as there wasn't, you can only poke fun at me."</p> - -<p>"Oh, we didn't mean anything!" said Bob, quickly. "I was only joking, -Sammy. Go ahead; tell us what you mean by it not being over yet."</p> - -<p>"I mean we haven't found out who that queer old man is with the -lantern," said Sammy. "I'm sure there's some mystery about him."</p> - -<p>"Pirate gold; do you mean?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm not going to say that again, and have you fellows laugh at -me!" exclaimed the lad who did so much sensational thinking. "But that -man is after something around here."</p> - -<p>"I agree on that," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"But what is it?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"That's what we've got to find out!" declared Sammy, promptly. "Fellows, -what's the matter with us trailing that queer man, until we find out all -about him."</p> - -<p>"Trail him?" questioned Bob.</p> - -<p>"Yes," went on Sammy. "We'll try to find where he lives, and what he is -after."</p> - -<p>"And why he goes about nights with a lantern," added Frank. He and Bob -were now as much interested as was Sammy, and they were eager to help -their chum clear up the mystery.</p> - -<p>Getting to the cottage, they found company had come to call on Mr. and -Mrs. Bouncer, and before the boys went to bed they had to tell all about -their adventure at the lighthouse.</p> - -<p>"My, you boys certainly do things!" exclaimed one of the callers.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span></p><p>"Yes, too much, sometimes," said Mrs. Bouncer, with a sigh, as she -looked at her son and his chums. "I never know what they'll be up to -next. That's one reason I rather dreaded coming here. I didn't so much -mind it at home, for though they were out on Rainbow Lake much of the -time, there was a limit to that water. But here, so near the big -ocean,—I don't know. I'm always afraid they'll be carried out to sea!" -and she shivered slightly, as if from some unknown fear.</p> - -<p>"Carried out to sea!" exclaimed Bob. "How could we be? We never go as -far as the inlet."</p> - -<p>"And I hope you never will!" exclaimed his mother.</p> - -<p>The boys told more in detail of their doings at the lighthouse and then -were sent off to bed, for the hour was growing late. They only made a -mention of the strange man with the lantern, whom they had passed in the -darkness, and they did not tell of their intention to get on his trail, -and try to find out who he was and what he was after. They thought that, -had they spoken of him, permission to seek after his secret might not be -given.</p> - -<p>"Well, what's on the program this morning?" asked Bob, after breakfast -one day.</p> - -<p>"Me for a swim, as soon as it gets a little warmer," decided Frank, for -the morning was a bit chilly.</p> - -<p>"I'm with you!" agreed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Can't you boys get a few crabs first?" asked Mrs. Bouncer. "I'd like -some to make a salad. The tide is right now; isn't it?"</p> - -<p>"Yes, it's coming in, and they always bite best on the incoming tide," -replied Bob, who had learned that from an old fisherman. "What do you -say, fellows; shall we go crabbing?"</p> - -<p>"Sure," agreed his chums. "We can swim later."</p> - -<p>Accordingly with crab nets, pieces of meat tied on strings for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> bait, -and a deep basket in which to keep the catch, the boys set off in their -boat, for the other side of the cove, since there the larger crabs could -be gotten.</p> - -<p>They had good luck, and were busy pulling in some large ones, with big -blue claws, when Bob suddenly called to his companions:</p> - -<p>"Look, there he is now!"</p> - -<p>They glanced up, to see, some distance back from the beach, in a clump -of scrub evergreen trees, a man digging.</p> - -<p>"There's our man of mystery!" exclaimed Sammy. "Let's trail him, -fellows!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER VIII</span> <span class="smaller">DRIVEN BACK</span></h2> - -<p>Sammy's two chums did not answer for a minute. They looked at each -other, and then Frank exclaimed:</p> - -<p>"I've got a bite, and a big one, too. Pass that net down here!"</p> - -<p>For a moment the prospect of catching another crab was greater even than -the chance of finding out something about the strange man. Bob handed -his companion the net, and Frank cautiously began pulling up on the cord -to which was fastened the chunk of meat-bait. With his other hand he -held the net ready to plunge into the water, and scoop up his prize.</p> - -<p>"There he is!" cried Bob, whose bait was not then being taken. "Get him, -Frank!"</p> - -<p>"I will. Don't get excited and rock the boat. I'll have him in a -minute!"</p> - -<p>"There!" exclaimed Sammy, whose attention was also taken away from the -man for the moment. "Net him!"</p> - -<p>Frank plunged the net into the water, trying to get it under the crab, -which was clinging to the meat with its claws. But the boy was not quite -quick enough, or else he hit the crab with the iron ring of the net, for -the creature suddenly let go, and with a quick motion of his broad, -swimming flippers went scurrying off into the depths again.</p> - -<p>"Oh, he got away!" cried Bob, in disappointed tones.</p> - -<p>"You weren't quite quick enough," spoke Sammy.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p><p>"I was so! You jiggled my arm, and made the net hit him!" exclaimed -Frank. "It was the biggest one I had, too; a yellow fellow, full of -meat!" and he gazed reproachfully at Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I did not jiggle your arm!" returned Sammy.</p> - -<p>"You did so!"</p> - -<p>"I did not!"</p> - -<p>"Fellows, if we're going to trail that mysterious man, let's do it, and -not scrap," suggested Bob. This was as near to a quarrel as any of the -chums ever got. Frank's little burst of temper was soon over.</p> - -<p>"Well, we've got enough crabs, anyhow," he said, looking into the basket -where they were kept, covered with seaweed, so the sun would not make -them die. For crabs are only good when cooked alive, or soon after they -have died. Otherwise they are very likely to be poisonous.</p> - -<p>"Yes, we have a good mess," agreed Sammy. "I didn't mean to jiggle your -arm, if I did, Frank," he went on. "I'll give you one of my crabs to pay -for it, if you say so."</p> - -<p>"You will not! They all go in the same kettle, anyhow. Say, Bob," he -went on, "what's the matter with having a clam roast out on the beach -some night?"</p> - -<p>"Sure we can," said Bob. "We'll build a fire, roast clams and boil -crabs, and have some of the other fellows over. That'll be fun!"</p> - -<p>"It sure will," agreed Sammy. "But say, fellows, what about him?" and he -nodded in the direction of the old man in the clump of evergreen trees. -He was still digging away, seemingly paying no attention to anything, or -anyone, around him. "Are we going to follow him, or not?"</p> - -<p>"We can't follow him, when he isn't going anywhere," observed Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, but he may start off at any time," said Sammy. "We<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> could tell -where he lives, and then we could find out something about him. As it is -now we can't even tell who he is, and there are a lot of men who look -like him around Lighthouse Cove."</p> - -<p>"Well, what's your plan?" asked Frank, carefully pulling up his crab -line, in the hope that the big fellow had again taken the meat. One was -there, but it was so small that he shook it off, not wanting to net it.</p> - -<p>"I say let's row close over to where he is," suggested Sammy. "Then, -when he starts off, we can go ashore and follow him."</p> - -<p>"Maybe he's got a boat hidden somewhere on shore," said Bob. "Let's take -a look."</p> - -<p>The boys scanned the beach, but could see nothing of another craft. -Meanwhile, the old man in the clump of evergreens continued to dig away. -He paid no attention to the boys.</p> - -<p>"Tell you what it is," said Sammy, at length, "we've got to play foxy -now. We don't want any more of that hermit business."</p> - -<p>"What do you mean?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, you know what happened when we followed that old man on Pine -Island. He pushed us over a cliff into a snow bank."</p> - -<p>"Ha! Ha!" laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter?" demanded Sammy. "I don't see anything to laugh at."</p> - -<p>"You don't? Well, there's no snow bank, for one thing."</p> - -<p>"Well, you now what I mean," said Sammy. "He might make trouble for us. -I say we'd better be careful."</p> - -<p>"That's what I say, too," agreed Frank. "Now the best way, I think, will -be to let our boat drift. We can pretend<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> we are crabbing, but we can -pull up the anchor, and the tide will take us nearly to where he is -digging. He can't say anything, if we do that, for we have a right to -drift."</p> - -<p>"Yes, and then we can see if he has a boat," added Sammy. "I guess -that's the best plan. But what about these crabs, Bob? Won't your mother -want them for dinner?"</p> - -<p>"No, she's going to make them into a salad for supper. We fellows will -have to cook 'em, and pick 'em out of the shells, I expect. There will -be time enough when we get in. Let's trail this old man now."</p> - -<p>Accordingly the small pronged anchor, that held the boat from drifting -while the crabbing was going on, was hauled up, and put in the bow. -Then, while pretending to be busy with their crab lines, the boys let -their craft drift with the tide over toward the shore.</p> - -<p>The old man was still digging away, but he had moved his position and -was now deeper in the clump of trees.</p> - -<p>"I'm sure he's after pirate gold!" exclaimed Sammy, in a whisper, for he -knew sounds carry very distinctly over water, and he did not want the -digging man to hear him.</p> - -<p>"He's after something, right enough," agreed Frank. "What it is we can -find out later."</p> - -<p>"There's a boat, anyhow," put in Bob, pointing to one partly hidden -under some brush and seaweed not far from the shore.</p> - -<p>"That's right!" cried Sammy. "That shows he came from some other part of -the Cove. We'll follow him!"</p> - -<p>But, for the present, the man did not show any sign of being about to -leave the clump of trees. He was digging away, paying no attention to -anything around him, save to glance up now and then. If he saw the boys, -as he must have done, he gave no sign.</p> - -<p>Bob and his two chums, now that they were where they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> wanted to get, -again threw the anchor overboard, and resumed their crabbing. But luck -was not so good here, the boat being too near shore. However, they -wanted an excuse for remaining near the man, and this gave them one.</p> - -<p>"Here he comes!" suddenly exclaimed Sammy, as he wound up his crab line -for future use. "Get ready now, boys."</p> - -<p>The others looked up. Coming down toward the beach was the strange old -man. Over his shoulder were a pick and a shovel, and in one hand he -carried a square wooden box, with a strap for a handle.</p> - -<p>"What do you s'pose he has that for?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"To put the gold in," said Sammy, promptly, "or else that holds the map, -and directions for finding the treasure."</p> - -<p>"The directions can't be very good," spoke Bob, "for he's been digging -in lots of places, far apart, too. I think that gold business is all -bosh!"</p> - -<p>"Hush! He'll hear you!" cautioned Frank, for the old man had looked -sharply in the direction of the boys.</p> - -<p>"I don't care," spoke Bob. "This is a free country."</p> - -<p>The boys had again pulled up anchor, and taken to the oars. They were -pulling out from shore now. The old man went to where the other boat was -partly hidden, and slid it down over the sand to the water. Then, -putting in his tools and the box, he entered the craft himself, and -began to row up toward the head of the Cove.</p> - -<p>"Come on!" said Sammy, to his chums. "We've got to follow."</p> - -<p>"Do you think we'd better?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Sure; why not?" was the answer. "We've got to find out about him; -haven't we?"</p> - -<p>To this the others had no objection. They were as interested, now, as -Sammy was in solving the mystery. So, when the old<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> man rowed off, more -quickly than the boys supposed one of his age could do, they followed, -but at a distance.</p> - -<p>The day was a fine one, there was only a little wind, and the tide was -with them.</p> - -<p>"But it won't be so easy rowing back against the current," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, don't worry," advised Sammy, eager to find where the strange man -lived.</p> - -<p>They did not have long to wait. A little later, after turning a point of -land, the man rowed up to a small dock, in front of a small house, and, -tieing his boat there, got out and went up the slope.</p> - -<p>"Come on!" called Sammy, a moment later. "Let's go ashore."</p> - -<p>"Maybe he won't like it," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>"Oh, he won't care," was the answer. "He's seen us following him, and he -didn't say anything. Come on."</p> - -<p>Rather against their will, Frank and Bob followed Sammy. He sent the -boat up on the beach, and threw out the anchor in the sand to hold the -craft against the tide. Then, followed by his chums, he approached the -small cottage.</p> - -<p>But if the boys imagined the aged man was going to witness their -approach in silence they were disappointed. He reached his porch, and -putting his pick, shovel and box down there, turned and hurried to meet -Sammy and his chums.</p> - -<p>"Did you boys want to see me?" he asked, and his voice was rather stern. -He did not speak like the fishermen of the cove, but more, as Sammy said -afterward, like Mr. Tetlow, the school principal, when he was angry.</p> - -<p>"We—we just wanted to see," began Sammy, uncertain whether or not to -tell his suspicions about the pirate gold, and to be allowed a share in -the secret.</p> - -<p>"Now look here, boys!" interrupted the aged man,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> sternly. "I don't want -to be harsh toward you, but you must get away from here. I said nothing -when you followed me, not thinking you would land on my property. This -is private land, and there has been a 'no trespass' sign up, but it has -fallen down. I will put it up again. I want no strangers around here.</p> - -<p>"My neighbors around me know this, and do not bother me. It is probably -because you are strangers that you have come here. Now I will not have -it. Later on I may be glad to see you, but now I must ask you to leave!"</p> - -<p>He stood looking at the boys sternly. They had been ordered away, and -there was nothing for them to do but to obey.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER IX</span> <span class="smaller">IN THE BOAT</span></h2> - -<p>"Well, we didn't find out anything."</p> - -<p>"No, we had all our trouble for our pains."</p> - -<p>"But we know where he lives—that's something we didn't know before."</p> - -<p>This last was said by Sammy Brown. His two chums, Bob and Frank, had -made the other remarks. The boys were rowing toward Barnacle Cottage, -having been practically driven away from the place to which they had -trailed the strange old man. His manner had been severe and stern, yet -the boys knew he had right and justice on his side.</p> - -<p>"We couldn't do anything but go," said Bob. "He could have had us -arrested for trespass if we didn't."</p> - -<p>"That's right," admitted Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, I didn't think he'd be quite so sharp," said Sammy, after a -moment. "I thought he was a sort of simple old man, like some of the -fishermen around here."</p> - -<p>"But he's a lot different," spoke Frank. "Did you see how his eyes -snapped, when he told us to get away?"</p> - -<p>"I should say I did!" answered Bob. "He was real angry."</p> - -<p>"But he spoke good enough to us," said Sammy. "I s'pose it was a crazy -idea to go there in broad daylight, when he was at home. Next time I'll -go at night, or when he's away."</p> - -<p>"What! Are you going again?" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"I should say I am! I'm going to get at the bottom of this yet!" -declared Sammy.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span></p><p>"And when you do get to the bottom, it will fall out, just as it always -does, and you'll have all your trouble for nothing," said Frank, with a -laugh.</p> - -<p>"Will I? Well, I'll see," answered Sammy, confidently. "I'm sure that -man is trying to hide something."</p> - -<p>"I thought he was trying to <i>find</i> something, from what you said at -first—the pirates' gold!" laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, you know what I mean," returned Sammy. "Quit your fooling!"</p> - -<p>They rowed on in silence for a few minutes, and suddenly Frank, who was -in the stern, gave a loud yell.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter?" asked Bob. "See a shark?"</p> - -<p>"No, but a crab's got my toe! Look out! They're getting out of the -basket!"</p> - -<p>He jumped up on the stern seat, holding out one bare foot—to the big -toe of which a large crab was clinging with his strong claw.</p> - -<p>"Take him off!" cried Frank, dancing about.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i071.jpg" alt="Take him off! cried Frank" /></div> - -<p class="bold">"Take him off!" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"Take him off yourself!" exclaimed Sammy. "Think we want to get nipped?"</p> - -<p>"Look out! You'll upset the boat!" cautioned Bob. "Keep still; can't -you?"</p> - -<p>"No, I can't, and I guess you couldn't, either, with a big blue-claw -crab nipping you!" cried Frank. "Ouch! Get him off; can't you!"</p> - -<p>He was trying to do this for himself, but the crab, that was one of the -biggest caught, had one claw free, and every time Frank reached out his -hand to grasp the creature, and pull it from his toe, the crab would -open his other claw, and wave it around threateningly. So Frank was a -bit cautious about taking hold of the creature.</p> - -<p>"Look out! The others are getting out!" cried Sammy, as he glanced at -the basket of crabs.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span></p><p>It was only too true. The boys had paid no attention to their catch for -some time, and the crabs had pushed their way up from beneath the -seaweed, and were crawling over the edge.</p> - -<p>"Clap something on top of the basket!" cried Sammy. "Hand me that board, -Frank."</p> - -<p>"Can't! I've got troubles of my own! Ouch, let go, can't you!" he cried -to the crab, which did not seem to want to do this.</p> - -<p>"Wow! One's got me, too!" exclaimed Bob, turning quickly about.</p> - -<p>"Smash him against the side of the boat!" advised Sammy to Frank, and, -seeing this was good advice, the boy did so.</p> - -<p>Crack went the hard crab against the gunwale, and the claw by which it -had been clinging to Frank's toe came off. Crabs claws often come loose -and new ones grow on again. So the creature was not much hurt.</p> - -<p>"Whew! That's better!" gasped Frank, as he opened the nippers of the -claw that still clung to his toe, in spite of the fact that it was -severed from the body of the crab.</p> - -<p>"Let go, can't you!" cried Bob, to the crab nipping him.</p> - -<p>"Try Frank's trick," advised Sammy.</p> - -<p>Bob did so, but the result was not exactly what was looked for.</p> - -<p>The boy hit the crab, that had hold of his hand, such a blow against the -side of the boat, that, losing his balance, Bob leaned too far over.</p> - -<p>"Look out! You'll upset us!" cried Frank, who was nursing his nipped -toe.</p> - -<p>It was too late. The boat tilted, and, aided by the tide and the frantic -efforts of the boys to prevent it, over went the craft, spilling out the -three chums, crabs, and all. Then such confusion as there was!</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span></p><p>Gasping and choking, from their sudden and unexpected bath, the boys -came to the surface of the water. They were all good swimmers, and, -fortunately had on only thin shirts and light trousers—almost bathing -suits, in fact.</p> - -<p>"Grab the oars!" called Sammy.</p> - -<p>"And don't let the boat get away!" added Frank.</p> - -<p>"There go the crabs!" shouted Bob, as he saw the basket containing their -catch sail away on the tide, the crabs scrambling out, rejoicing in -their unexpected liberty.</p> - -<p>"Too late! We can't save 'em—have to catch some more!" called Bob. "Get -the oars and the boat!"</p> - -<p>"Going to right the boat?" asked Frank, as he swam to get a drifting -oar.</p> - -<p>"No, it's too much work here. Let's swim with her down to the lighthouse -dock, pull her out there, and dump the water out. Then we can row home."</p> - -<p>It was good advice; and the best and easiest thing to do. With the -recovered oars, and their crab nets, the boys swam along toward shore, -pushing the boat ahead of them. The water was not over their heads, and -soon they could wade.</p> - -<p>"Had an upset; didn't you?" called Mr. Floyd, the light-keeper, who was -at the dock as the boys came along.</p> - -<p>"Sort of," admitted Sammy, ruefully.</p> - -<p>"Lost all our crabs, too," added Frank.</p> - -<p>"Yes, and mother won't like it," put in Bob. "She was counting on 'em -for salad for supper."</p> - -<p>"Never mind, as long as you're all right," advised the light-keeper. -"And as for crabs, I've been amusing myself catching a mess this -morning. I've got more than I want, and I'll let you have some. Big ones -they are, too. Where you been?"</p> - -<p>They told him, and then, in a sudden burst of confidence, Sammy related -about the strange old man, and told of how he had driven them away from -his cottage.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p><p>Mr. Floyd chuckled, as he limped about on a cane, for he was able to be -around now, though he could not go up and down the tower stairs.</p> - -<p>"So you ran afoul of the professor; did you?" he asked with a laugh.</p> - -<p>"Is that who he is—a professor?" asked Sammy eagerly. "What is he -always digging for—pirate's gold?"</p> - -<p>"Land love you, boy, I don't know; and no one else does, as far as I can -learn," said Mr. Floyd. "He's been in these parts for some time now, but -nobody knows what his game is. Digging; eh? Yes, he's always doing -that."</p> - -<p>"At night, too," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes, night don't seem to make any difference to him," admitted the -lighthouse-keeper. "He's a mighty queer man."</p> - -<p>"What's his name?" asked Frank, binding a bit of his handkerchief about -his crab-bitten toe, while he and the other boys sat in the warm sun on -the dock, letting their clothes dry.</p> - -<p>"Watson—Professor Watson he calls himself," said Mr. Floyd. "No one -seems to know much about him. He doesn't mix with us folks much—lives -all alone in that cabin."</p> - -<p>"Do you really think he might be looking for the pirate gold?" asked -Sammy eagerly.</p> - -<p>"Well, he might be," admitted Mr. Floyd. "Lots of wiser folks, and some -more foolish than he seems to be, have dug for it—but never found it. -He might have the craze, too. But I wouldn't advise you boys to bother -him too much."</p> - -<p>"Is he dangerous?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, I wouldn't go so far as to say that," replied the light-keeper, -slowly. "But you know you have no right to go on his land, and he might -have you arrested."</p> - -<p>"Did he ever have anyone taken in?" Frank wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"No, but he sued Nate Hardon, his next door neighbor, <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span>because Nate's -dog dug up the garden. And the funny thing of it was that the professor -didn't have anything planted in that garden, as far as any of us could -find out. He just got provoked because Nate's dog dug some holes, and he -sued Nate. He won his case, too, and got six cents damage."</p> - -<p>"Six cents! Is that all?" asked Sammy, in surprise.</p> - -<p>"Oh, he didn't want the money," explained the light-keeper. "He just -wanted the courts to say that Nate's dog had no right in the garden, and -it hadn't, I s'pose. Anyhow, Nate had to build his fence over.</p> - -<p>"But the professor, as we call him, is sure a queer character. I don't -know what he's after, but whatever it is he hasn't found it. We folks -leave him alone, and I guess you boys had better, too."</p> - -<p>"Did you see him around here that night, when the light went out?" asked -Sammy.</p> - -<p>"No, I didn't," answered Mr. Floyd, and Sammy did not say why he had -asked.</p> - -<p>The boys' clothing was nearly dry now, and, the water having been -emptied from the boat, which was pulled up on the beach, the lads -started for Barnacle Cottage.</p> - -<p>They took with them some of the crabs Mr. Floyd gave them, so their -accident did not prevent Mr. Bouncer from having a fine supper that -night. The boys built a fire out of doors, and boiled the crabs, -afterward picking the meat out of the shells.</p> - -<p>Talk as they did over the queer encounter with Professor Watson they -could not come to any understanding of what object he might have in -digging in various places. Sammy still stuck to his idea about the -buried gold, but his chums did not agree with him.</p> - -<p>Vacation days at Lighthouse Cove were slipping by. Already about half -the Summer was gone, and the boys were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span> counting with regret on the time -when they would have to go back to Fairview and to school.</p> - -<p>They had more good times this Summer, so they said, than ever before. -They went in swimming, rowed about in their boat, and caught so many -fish and crabs that Mr. Bouncer said he could feel the salt water -running out of his ears.</p> - -<p>More visits were paid to the lighthouse, too, and the boys were always -welcome there since they had done Mr. Floyd such a service. The -light-keeper told them many fine stories.</p> - -<p>At other times they went to the ocean beach, where the surf was heavier -than in the cove near Barnacle Cottage. They were allowed to bathe in -the shallow part of the ocean, near shore, but Mr. or Mrs. Bouncer kept -sharp watch over them at such times.</p> - -<p>The boys made many acquaintances among the fishermen and sailors who -lived at the Cove, and were often taken out in the boats. Best of all -they liked to go with Silas Warner, who had a large motor boat, one that -was able to go through the inlet, and out to sea, when it was not too -rough. Silas often went on long fishing trips, and when he only cruised -about in the Cove Mrs. Bouncer allowed her son and his chums to go with -him.</p> - -<p>But she would never consent to their going out on the open ocean, though -Silas often offered to take them. His boat, the <i>Skip</i>, had a cabin, and -several persons could sleep aboard her.</p> - -<p>"The ocean is too dangerous for the boys," said Mrs. Bouncer.</p> - -<p>One day when Bob and his chums were down at Silas Warner's dock, -watching him fix the engine in the <i>Skip</i>, he called to them:</p> - -<p>"Want to come for a ride?"</p> - -<p>"Sure. Where you going?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span></p><p>"Oh, down by the bridge. I've got to get some supplies. I won't be very -long."</p> - -<p>The bridge was down near the inlet, where the ocean and cove met, -surging their waters together over the sand bar. It was a fine, long -trip.</p> - -<p>"I guess we can go," said Bob, as he ran to ask his mother. She gave her -permission, for the day was a fine, calm one, although hot, and she knew -the boys would enjoy the trip on the water.</p> - -<p>Soon, in the big motor boat, with Silas at the wheel, the boys started -off in great delight. They waved good-bye to Mrs. Bouncer, who stood in -the doorway of the cottage. Little did the boys think how much would -happen before they saw her again.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER X</span> <span class="smaller">CARRIED OUT TO SEA</span></h2> - -<p>"May I steer a bit?" asked Bob, when he and his chums had ridden in the -big motor boat some distance down the cove toward the bridge, that was -not far from the inlet.</p> - -<p>"I guess so," answered Silas. "There aren't many craft about now, and I -don't believe you'll run into anybody."</p> - -<p>"I wish I'd asked him," murmured Sammy to Frank. "But I didn't think -he'd let us."</p> - -<p>All the boys were eager to take the wheel.</p> - -<p>"We can take turns," said Bob, generously. Now that he had permission to -do what he had long been anxious to, he was not going to be selfish. -"Can't we take turns, Silas?" he asked.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I guess so," was the good-natured answer. "It'll be as good a time -as any to give you boys some points on steering. No telling when you may -have a boat of your own."</p> - -<p>"I wanted my father to get one this year," said Bob, "only he said I was -too young to run it, and he didn't have time. When I go back I'll tell -him I can steer a boat, and maybe he'll get one."</p> - -<p>"I hope he does!" cried Sammy, with visions of what fine fun he and his -chums would have in a power boat of their own.</p> - -<p>"Well, there's a heap sight more to learn about a motor boat than just -steering it," said Silas, with a grin, "though<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> maybe steering comes -first. Now I'll show you what to do, and how to do it. Of course I can't -show you all the different twists and turns of the channel now—it would -take too long to learn them. But I can show you how to steer a boat, how -to keep her straight, and how to go to port or starboard, or left and -right, as they say now."</p> - -<p>The three boys gathered about him as he sat at the wheel, which was made -fast to a bulkhead, or partition just outside the cabin. The cabin of -the <i>Skip</i> took up about half of the boat, the forward part. The after -part was an open space, beneath the floor of which was the motor running -in a sort of cockpit.</p> - -<p>The motor was covered with a cover, or hatch, as it is called, and when -this was in place you could not see the machinery, though it was running -beneath your feet.</p> - -<p>The cabin was of good size, and had small bunks in it that could be made -up into beds. There were also lockers for food and water, and a small -oil stove on which Silas cooked when he went off on fishing trips. In -fact the <i>Skip</i> was a snug little craft.</p> - -<p>"This wheel is what is called a sea wheel," went on Silas, beginning his -steering lesson.</p> - -<p>"Aren't all wheels sea wheels?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, on some motor boats there are what are called land-lubber wheels."</p> - -<p>"What's the difference?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"It's easy to remember, once you've heard it," said Silas. "A -land-lubber wheel turns in the same direction you want the boat to -steer. For instance, if you want to go to the left you twist the wheel -toward your left hand, and if you want to go to the right you twist it -to the right.</p> - -<p>"But a sea wheel is just the opposite from this. With that, if you want -your boat to go to the left, you turn the wheel to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> right, and if -you want to go to the right you twist the wheel to the left."</p> - -<p>"I should think you'd get all twisted up!" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Well, you might, at first, but once you've learned to use a sea wheel -you won't want any other," went on Silas. "I'm not saying but what it -might not have been better at the start, for every boat to have a wheel -you could turn in the direction you wanted to go, but as long as they -have sea wheels you might as well learn that way. Now we'll begin."</p> - -<p>In turn he let the boys handle the wheel, sending the boat this way and -that, until they found how quickly the <i>Skip</i> responded to her rudder.</p> - -<p>At first each of the lads got a little confused, and turned the wheel -the wrong way. But soon they remembered, and when Silas, pretending he -was the captain, ordered them to go to the right or left they did do it -without any trouble.</p> - -<p>They passed several other boats from time to time, and Silas showed how -to get by them without getting too far out of the channel, or without -passing too close to the other craft. There was a compressed air whistle -on the <i>Skip</i> and the boys took great delight in blowing this.</p> - -<p>"It's a heap more fun on a trip like this than trailing that queer old -Professor Watson!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>"That's right," said Frank. "I don't believe we'll bother with him any -more."</p> - -<p>"No, I guess I was wrong about that pirate gold," admitted Sammy, and -his chums laughed, for this was the first time he had ever given up. But -he was so interested in the motor boat that he thought of little else.</p> - -<p>The trip to the bridge, just above the inlet, was rather a long one, but -the boys enjoyed every bit of it, and they were sorry when the <i>Skip</i> -pulled up to a dock, and Silas announced that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> he would stay there for -some time, buying supplies for himself, and for a number of other -fishermen, who had asked him to obtain things for them. There was a -general store at the bridge—a store which supplied many sailors and -fishermen with the things they needed for their work.</p> - -<p>While waiting for Silas, the boys went ashore and wandered about the -little settlement about the store. Finally the fisherman came out and -said:</p> - -<p>"Boys, I find I've got to go down near the inlet after some stuff. Now -you said your folks didn't want you to go there, and I don't want to -take you when Mrs. Bouncer said you weren't to go. So you'd better stay -here until I come back. I won't be long."</p> - -<p>"Oh, that's no fun!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>"I wonder if we couldn't go," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>"There isn't any danger; is there?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I don't think so," answered Silas, "but them women folks has their own -opinions. I never go agin 'em."</p> - -<p>The three chums were much disappointed, when Bob saw a telephone on the -wall.</p> - -<p>"That's the thing!" he cried. "I'm going to telephone my mother at the -cottage, and ask her if we can't go. I'll tell her there's no danger."</p> - -<p>"And you can tell her I said so," put in Silas, for he liked the -Fairview boys, and wanted to give them the pleasures of the trip.</p> - -<p>Bob was soon talking to his mother over the wire, and, after some -hesitation, she said the boys might make the longer trip. And, on the -suggestion of Silas, Bob said they would probably not be home for -dinner, since it would be late.</p> - -<p>"We'll just get a lunch on my boat," said Silas. "I've got plenty to -eat, and a stove to cook it on."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span></p><p>"Oh, that will be fine!" cried Sammy, and the others agreed with him.</p> - -<p>So it was arranged, and a little later the <i>Skip</i> went under the bridge, -and pointed her bow toward the broader and deeper waters that led to the -inlet.</p> - -<p>It was about three miles to where the waters of the ocean and Cove met, -and the channel was so twisting, on account of the shifting sands, that -Silas did not like to let the boys steer. So he held the wheel himself.</p> - -<p>From time to time, as the boat went on Silas would raise the hatch -cover, and look at the throbbing motor, to see that it was running all -right. Once in a while he would oil it. The boys looked on with interest -when he did this, and asked many questions.</p> - -<p>Silas explained how he had to spin the flywheel around to start the -motor, and how he turned on the spark and gasolene. Sometimes, he said, -the motor would start when the electric switch was closed, without the -flywheel being turned by hand.</p> - -<p>Now and then, as the <i>Skip</i> went along, Silas would look up at the sky, -and shake his head as though in doubt.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter?" asked Sammy, after a bit.</p> - -<p>"I don't like the looks of the weather," was the answer. "It looks to me -as though we were in for a heavy thunderstorm."</p> - -<p>"They're not dangerous; are they?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, not specially so. But down here, near the inlet, the wind -sometimes blows pretty strong, and when the tide's running out, as it is -now, there's a powerful current. I almost wish I hadn't brought you boys -along."</p> - -<p>"Oh, we're not afraid," said Frank with confidence. "The <i>Skip</i> is a -good boat; isn't she?"</p> - -<p>"There's none better afloat, for her size," said Silas proudly. "I've -ridden out many a gale in her down in the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> big bay. But of course the -ocean is different. However, I'll just hurry through and maybe we can -get back before she blows too hard. I think we'll have a bite to eat -now, for we may not get time later. Here, one of you boys take the -wheel. There's a straight course now, and I'll get out the things and -make some coffee."</p> - -<p>This was soon done, and the boys sat about, eating the sandwiches Silas -made. They were having the time of their lives, and the fact that in the -West a big bank of black clouds was gathering, from which now and then -lightning flashed, did not worry them. They were sure they would get -back all right.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i085.jpg" alt="The boys sat about eating the sandwiches" /></div> - -<p class="bold">The boys sat about eating the sandwiches.</p> - -<p>Silas had to stop at a small dock, not far from the inlet, where an old -sailmaker had his shanty. The fisherman was to call for a sail for one -of his neighbors.</p> - -<p>Silas made fast the <i>Skip</i> in a hurry, and, leaping out on the dock, -called to the boys:</p> - -<p>"Wait here until I come back. I won't be long. Then we'll head for -Lighthouse Cove."</p> - -<p>"All right," answered Bob. "We'll be all right."</p> - -<p>The darkness had increased because of the clouds, and now a strong wind -sprang up. It whipped the waters of the channel into whitecaps, and -this, with the strong tide that was running, made the <i>Skip</i> strain hard -at her mooring rope.</p> - -<p>The wind blew harder, and then with a sudden outbreak of fury the storm -broke, the rain coming down in such torrents that the boys could not see -the shanty of the sailmaker.</p> - -<p>"Get in the cabin!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"That's right!" yelled Frank. "We'll be soaked here!"</p> - -<p>They tumbled into the cabin, which was below the level of the cockpit -deck, and pulled the sliding doors shut.</p> - -<p>"Now we're all snug—let her rain!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>And rain it did. The pelting drops made so much noise<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> on the cabin roof -that the boys had to shout to make each other hear. The thunder was -terrific, and the bright lightning cut through the blackness that was -almost as dark as night.</p> - -<p>"Say, this boat is bobbing some!" suddenly exclaimed Frank.</p> - -<p>Indeed the <i>Skip</i> was in violent motion, and the boys did not know what -to make of it. She swung about, and then brought up suddenly as the rope -tightened.</p> - -<p>Then, all at once, there was a violent jerk, and the boat swung about -more than ever.</p> - -<p>"I hope that rope holds!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"So do I!" exclaimed Bob. "What if it should break?"</p> - -<p>Then the <i>Skip</i> seemed to swing entirely around, and a moment later she -raced off through the storm, tossing violently up and down on the waves. -The boys heard confused shouts above the noise of the storm.</p> - -<p>"What is it?" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Something has happened!" yelled Frank.</p> - -<p>"I'm going to have a look," said Bob resolutely, as he slid back one of -the cabin doors. The burst of wind and rain in his face almost drove him -within again, but he went out into the little open space.</p> - -<p>Then his worst fears were realized. The <i>Skip</i> had broken away from her -dock, and was racing before the wind and tide down the channel toward -the inlet.</p> - -<p>Bob could just make out, on the end of the dock, the figure of an -excited man, waving his hands to him. But what he said could not be -heard. Bob was sure the man was Silas.</p> - -<p>"What is it—what's happened?" called Frank.</p> - -<p>"We've broken loose!" shouted Bob, coming back into the cabin. Even in -those few seconds he had been drenched with the rain.</p> - -<p>"Broken loose from where?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span></p><p>"From the dock. We're adrift!"</p> - -<p>"Adrift! Where are we going?" gasped Sammy and Frank together.</p> - -<p>"We're being carried out to sea, I guess," answered Bob, and there was -fear in his voice, much as he tried to hide it.</p> - -<p>Meanwhile the <i>Skip</i>, at the mercy of the wind and tide, was being -carried faster and faster out toward the inlet that led to the great ocean.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XI</span> <span class="smaller">IN THE STORM</span></h2> - -<p>Despairingly the boys, shut up in the cabin of the <i>Skip</i>, looked at one -another. They had to cling to the bunks and the sides of the bulkheads -in order not to be thrown down, so violent was the motion of the craft. -Sometimes the boat would whirl completely around, and after this had -happened several times Bob cried:</p> - -<p>"Fellows, there's only one thing to do!"</p> - -<p>"What's that?" asked Sammy. "Can we do anything?"</p> - -<p>"We've just got to," said Frank. "If we don't we'll sink pretty soon, -and be drowned. I think I know what you mean, Bob. You mean we've got to -steer the boat?"</p> - -<p>"That's it! She's going every which way now, and there's no telling what -may happen. If we can get at the wheel we may be able to send her -ashore."</p> - -<p>"But the wheel is outside!" cried Sammy. "We can't go out in this storm -to steer."</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes we can, if we had to," said Bob. "But we don't have to. There's -another wheel inside the cabin, you know."</p> - -<p>And so there was, Silas having arranged this for his own comfort in -stormy weather. The <i>Skip</i> could be guided either by the wheel outside -in what might be called the cockpit, or from within the cabin. And in -the cabin, up forward, were small windows, or bull's-eyes, through which -the steersman could look.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p><p>"If we could only start the motor we could turn around and go back," -suggested Frank, while they were trying to make their way up front, to -the wheel, without banging against the sides of the cabin.</p> - -<p>"Oh, we'd better not try to monkey with that—especially in this storm," -said Bob. "If we can only keep the boat straight ahead, so it won't -whirl around so, and make us dizzy, it will be a good thing. After the -storm we can try the motor."</p> - -<p>"But by that time we will be out to sea!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"We can't help it," came from Bob. "Here goes now, to see what sort of a -course I can steer."</p> - -<p>The wheel was twisting and turning this way and that as the waves moved -the rudder. Bob turned the spokes until he had the one with ring marks -on it exactly upright in front of him. When this had been done, Silas -had told them, the rudder was straight, and the boat would go straight -ahead.</p> - -<p>And, as Bob looked from the bull's-eye, he saw nothing ahead but a -straight course of water. The waves had been whipped into whitecaps of -foam, but there seemed no obstruction, and with the wind blowing them, -and the tide carrying them, all the Fairview boys could do was to keep -on.</p> - -<p>"It sure is some storm!" murmured Frank, as a louder clash of thunder -than any before seemed to shake the very boat.</p> - -<p>"And we're in it!" murmured Sammy. "What will our folks think?"</p> - -<p>"Oh, Silas will tell them," said Bob, as he braced his feet apart to -meet the heaving motion of the boat.</p> - -<p>"Yes, he's left behind there on the dock," said Frank. "Our rope must -have broke when the wind and waves banged us about that time. He'll tell -the folks all right."</p> - -<p>"But that won't stop mother from worrying," said Bob, anxiously, for he -disliked to cause her or his father anxiety.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span></p><p>"They'll come after us," remarked Sammy. "Silas will get another boat -and come for us."</p> - -<p>"If he can find us," spoke Bob. "But if we go out to sea I don't believe -he can easily pick us up."</p> - -<p>"Oh, he will, sooner or later," went on Frank, who did not seem to feel -so badly about it as Bob did. "Don't get scared."</p> - -<p>"Oh, I'm not exactly scared," replied Bob, stoutly, "for this is a good -boat. But a storm at sea is no fun!"</p> - -<p>"Maybe it isn't storming out there," suggested Sammy.</p> - -<p>"It's sure to be," declared Bob. "But we've got to make the best of it. -We've got plenty to eat, that's one good thing."</p> - -<p>"And a good place to stay," added Frank. "We're better off than when the -<i>Puff</i> was wrecked."</p> - -<p>"But we may be wrecked yet," put in Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, cheer up!" advised Sammy. "We'll be laughing at this in a few -hours."</p> - -<p>"But how dark it is!" said Bob. "It's almost like night!"</p> - -<p>"We've got lanterns here," suggested Frank. "Why not light them? And it -might be good to show a light outside, so no other boat will run into -us."</p> - -<p>"Let's do it!" cried Bob. "I'll steer and you fellows can light up. -There are some oilskin suits in one of the lockers, Silas said. You can -put one on when you go outside."</p> - -<p>The lighting of the lanterns made the boys feel less gloomy, and when -Frank and Sammy, putting on the yellow oilskin coats, went outside and -hung lanterns there, the boat was in less danger of collision.</p> - -<p>"Say, we must be almost to the ocean," cried Frank, as he and Sammy came -into the cabin again.</p> - -<p>"What makes you think so?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Because I can hear the booming of the surf. We'll be out on it in a -little while."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span></p><p>"Well, we can't help it," said Bob. "I thought we were there long ago, -the way we bobbed up and down."</p> - -<p>"Yes, it is rough," said Sammy. "We must be almost in the inlet, -fellows. Silas said it was always dangerous to go through there."</p> - -<p>"But not so bad on the out-going tide," spoke Bob, quickly, and he was -glad he had remembered that point. "I guess we'll make it all right," he -added, hopefully.</p> - -<p>The storm did not grow less. The lightning still flashed and the thunder -rolled, while the rain came down in torrents. The cockpit was fitted -with scuppers, or openings that allowed the water to run off, or -otherwise the <i>Skip</i> would have been flooded. As it was, some water came -into the cabin under the doors. But the boys did not mind this.</p> - -<p>Had the motor been running they would have reached the inlet, and gone -through it into the open sea, some time before. But as it was they were -only blowing and drifting along.</p> - -<p>"Well, there's no use staying this way," said Frank, after a bit, as he -felt of his wet clothes. "I'm going to take off some of them and get -dry. We can light the oil stove."</p> - -<p>"And get something to eat," added Sammy.</p> - -<p>Somehow or other this idea seemed to make all the boys feel better. The -stove was soon glowing and the cabin was cozy and warm. Indeed, but for -the fact that they were storm-driven out to sea, and were so alarmed, -the boys would have enjoyed the adventure.</p> - -<p>They took off some of their wet garments, and hung them near the oil -stove to get dry. There were blankets in the bunks, and in these they -wrapped themselves up. Frank put some coffee on the stove to warm, -though the boys, as a rule did not take this beverage. Still they -thought it might prevent their taking cold.</p> - -<p>Little could now be seen outside, for to the darkness of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> storm was -added the gloom of coming night. The boys were anxious as to what Mrs. -Bouncer might think, and they did not know what would be the outcome of -this drifting into the ocean. But they could do nothing except what they -were doing.</p> - -<p>They could only hope for rescue.</p> - -<p>The boys were taking their coffee, and eating some of the sandwiches -Silas had made, when suddenly the boat was tossed about more violently -than ever before. She rose up, with her bow high in the air, and things -in the cabin slid toward the stern. Then the bow went down and the stern -rose up.</p> - -<p>"What's happening?" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"Listen!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>"That's the surf!" called Sammy. "We're going through the inlet into the -ocean!"</p> - -<p>There was a terrific crash of thunder, and a brilliant flash of -lightning. Looking through the bull's-eyes Bob could see the heaving -billows. Then, as the <i>Skip</i> ceased her violent motions, and began to -move regularly up and down, Bob cried:</p> - -<p>"We're out to sea, boys! Think of it! Out on the ocean!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XII</span> <span class="smaller">DRIFTING</span></h2> - -<p>Somehow, in spite of the fact that they tried to be brave, and to meet -the danger with as stout hearts as possible, the Fairview boys could not -repress a feeling of fear as the meaning of Bob's words came to them. -And the speaker himself shuddered a little as he looked out on the -heaving waters of the ocean, as the lightning made them plain to him.</p> - -<p>"Well, there's one good thing," said Frank, taking a long breath, "we're -not so likely to run into anything out here as we were in the cove or -inlet."</p> - -<p>"No, that's so," agreed Bob. "But the ocean is an awfully big place to -be out on—in a small boat."</p> - -<p>"This isn't such a small boat," said Sammy, quickly. "It's better to be -in this than in our rowboat."</p> - -<p>"Indeed it is!" said Frank. "Maybe we'll be all right by morning."</p> - -<p>"That's so—we will have to stay out here all night, I guess," said Bob, -ruefully. "There'll be no chance of being picked up until daylight, I -reckon."</p> - -<p>"If we're picked up then we'll be lucky," added Sammy. "This is -different from Rainbow Lake and Pine Island. It's so much larger."</p> - -<p>"But some ship might see our lights, and come for us," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>Bob shook his head.</p> - -<p>"I was talking to Silas about that the other day," he said.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> "No ships -come as close in shore as this. Some trawlers, that catch moss-bunker -fish for fertilizer, do, in the daytime, to let down their nets, but not -at night."</p> - -<p>"Then what chance have we of being rescued?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I guess we've as good a chance as any fellows would have who had -this happen to them," went on Bob. "In the morning the chances are some -ship will see us. We can make some sort of flag, for a distress signal, -I think. If we knew how we might fix our lanterns now, to show that we -needed help. But I don't know how to do it."</p> - -<p>Neither did the other boys, so it was decided to wait until morning. -Besides, none of them cared to go outside in the rain and darkness, now -that they were on the open ocean. It gave them a sort of "scary" -feeling. They did not say so, but they were a bit afraid, as they -admitted afterward, of falling overboard.</p> - -<p>The wind and rain still kept up, but the thunder and lightning were not -so bad, and for this they were glad. Then, too, they were not tossed -about so violently as they had been while in the waters of the Cove and -the inlet.</p> - -<p>There the shallow waters were more quickly disturbed by the wind, while -the deeper sea took longer to raise large waves.</p> - -<p>But, for all that, the <i>Skip</i> swayed and rocked in the grip of the -storm, for she was but a small boat to be on such broad waters. In the -hands of Silas Warner she might have ridden more easily, for her owner -would have known how to steer her.</p> - -<p>Then, too, he would have started the motor, and he could have kept her -head to the wind and waves, and this is always wise in a storm.</p> - -<p>But the boys could only let her drift, and this meant that at times the -craft would dip down into the trough of the sea,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> sinking with a motion -that made the lads feel as though their stomachs were going to drop out.</p> - -<p>Fortunately they were not seasick, for they were too used to the water -at home, and had been in some rough weather before. So they were -accustomed to the irregular motion. But it was not the more pleasant on -this account.</p> - -<p>Again the <i>Skip</i> would be blown around with her head to the wind and -waves, and at such times she would rise on the crest of a big roller -until, it seemed to the boys, as if she were going to shoot toward the -sky.</p> - -<p>Then the boat would slip down on the other side of the big hill of water -like a sled coasting down a snowy incline and the boys would look at -each other as though they feared they were going to the bottom of the -sea.</p> - -<p>But always the stanch little <i>Skip</i> would come up again.</p> - -<p>"She sure is a dandy boat!" exclaimed Bob, and the others agreed with -him.</p> - -<p>It was now about eight o'clock and quite dark. The storm still rumbled -and rolled about the boys, but they were getting used to it now.</p> - -<p>"It's dying out," said Frank, as he put on some of his clothes that had -dried by the oil stove.</p> - -<p>"Yes, by morning it will be calm again," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"If we could only get home by morning," spoke Bob, a bit sadly, and, in -spite of his resolution to be brave, he could not keep a few tears from -his eyes as he thought of his mother, who, he knew, would be frantic -about him.</p> - -<p>"Don't worry," said Frank, soothingly, for he guessed of what Bob was -thinking. "Silas will go there and tell your folks all about it, Bob. -Then he'll organize a searching party, and come after us in a big boat."</p> - -<p>"Yes, if he can find us," said Bob, gloomily.</p> - -<p>"Oh, sure he can find us!" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span></p><p>There was silence for a while, with the <i>Skip</i> drifting on in the storm -and darkness. Occasionally a bigger wave than usual would break over the -high bow, and come crashing down on the roof of the cabin. At times the -weight of water was so heavy that the boys feared the roof would be -crushed in, but the <i>Skip</i> was made to stand hard knocks, and well she -did it.</p> - -<p>"Well, what are we going to do?" asked Sammy, after a bit. The boys had -put on their clothing, which was warm and dry, and they were sitting -about the cabin, looking at one another, and wondering what would happen -next.</p> - -<p>"What can we do?" asked Bob. "We can only drift, until morning."</p> - -<p>"Then I say let's go to bed," proposed Frank. "We can't do any good by -sitting up, and maybe we can get some rest."</p> - -<p>"But supposing some vessel runs us down in the night?" suggested Bob.</p> - -<p>"That isn't likely to happen with our lights burning. Besides, staying -awake won't stop that."</p> - -<p>The boys were tired enough to turn in and stretch out on the bunks, -though possibly they were too alarmed and excited to sleep. As Frank had -said, their outside lights, the red and green and white, were glowing, -and any vessel, seeing them, would not run them down.</p> - -<p>"I say let's try something before we go to bed," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Try what?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Try to make someone hear us. Let's go outside and blow the air whistle -and yell. Maybe some passing ship may hear us and take us on board."</p> - -<p>"That's a good idea!" exclaimed Sammy. "We'd better go out anyhow, and -look to see if the lanterns are all right. We wouldn't want them to go -out in the night."</p> - -<p>It was still raining, but not so hard, and, putting on the suits<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> of -oilskins, the three chums made their way out to the open deck of the -<i>Skip</i>, behind the cabin bulkhead.</p> - -<p>Here they felt the full force of the wind, and the rain stung into their -faces. Also they felt the salty spray of the ocean as it blew over the -bow. All about them they could see the white-topped billows, and they -looked larger than they had from the cabin. Still the <i>Skip</i> seemed to -ride them well.</p> - -<p>A glance showed the boys that the lights were all right. They were full -of oil—Silas had told them he always kept them ready for instant use.</p> - -<p>"Now for a yell!" called Sammy, and the boys called together.</p> - -<p>Several times they did this, at the same time blowing the compressed air -whistle. But there came no answer, nor could they see the lights of any -passing ship. They appeared to be alone on the ocean in the storm and -darkness.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i099.jpg" alt="They appeared to be alone on the ocean" /></div> - -<p class="bold">They appeared to be alone on the ocean.</p> - -<p>"It's no use," said Bob, sadly.</p> - -<p>"No, let's go inside," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>"Besides, we want to save some of the air in the tank to blow the -whistle to-morrow," went on Sammy. "We can compress the air only when -the motor is running, and we can't start that."</p> - -<p>"Maybe we can," suggested Bob. "I'm going to have a try at that in the -morning, if we aren't picked up before."</p> - -<p>"Maybe it will start by just turning the switch. Silas said it did, -sometimes," spoke Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, don't try it now," exclaimed Bob, quickly. "We don't want to get -it going when we don't know which way to steer. Let's wait."</p> - -<p>And wait they did.</p> - -<p>Into the cabin they went again, out of the wind and rain. The shelter -seemed a cozy place in contrast to the blackness outside.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p><p>"Didn't it all happen suddenly?" remarked Bob. "One minute we were at -the dock, waiting for Silas to come back, and then, all at once, the -storm came up, we broke loose, and had started to drift. It all seems -like a dream."</p> - -<p>"I wish it was a dream," murmured Frank, "and that we'd wake up in -Barnacle Cottage."</p> - -<p>"I wonder if anyone could have cut or loosened our rope," spoke Sammy, -as though he were thinking of something.</p> - -<p>"What makes you say that?" asked Frank quickly. "The rope broke—that's -what happened."</p> - -<p>"I don't know about that," went on Sammy, mysteriously. "If a person had -been on that dock, and saw the boat tied there, it would be very easy to -slip the rope off the post."</p> - -<p>"Yes, that's true enough," admitted Frank. "But who would do such a mean -thing as that; especially when a storm was coming up, and we would be in -danger? Who would do such a thing?"</p> - -<p>"Well, the queer old professor who drove us away," answered Sammy.</p> - -<p>"There! I knew he was going to say that!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, of course I'm not saying for sure," spoke Sammy, quickly. -"But it might have happened. If that old man had been around he might -have thought that was a good chance to get rid of us, so we wouldn't -bother him again."</p> - -<p>"Well, that's all foolishness!" exclaimed Bob. "And, even if he did it, -I'm not going to bother him again, anyhow."</p> - -<p>"I am!" declared Sammy. "I'm going to find out what he knows about -pirate gold!"</p> - -<p>Frank and Bob laughed at him, but Sammy was very much in earnest.</p> - -<p>On and on drifted the <i>Skip</i>, driven by wind and tide. The night wore -on, and the boys, unable to stay up any longer, went to the bunks to -rest, lashing the steering wheel to keep<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> the rudder straight. They did -not know where they were going. They only knew they were drifting.</p> - -<p>The rain did not come down so hard now, and the wind had slackened. Only -once in a while did it lighten and thunder.</p> - -<p>It must have been near morning, for a faint, hazy light was coming in -through the bull's-eyes windows, when Sammy was suddenly awakened in his -bunk by feeling a shock. He jumped out into the middle of the cabin, -crying:</p> - -<p>"Fellows, we struck something! Maybe we've gone ashore!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XIII</span> <span class="smaller">THE ABANDONED BOAT</span></h2> - -<p>Bob and Frank were so surprised by Sammy's sudden call that they could -only stare stupidly at him, and try to rub some of the sleepy feeling -from their eyes. Then, as the bumping and grinding sound still kept up, -Sammy cried again:</p> - -<p>"Fellows, we sure have struck something. Maybe we're at a dock! Oh, I -hope so! I guess our voyage has ended!"</p> - -<p>"Good!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>Frank went to the forward bull's-eyes and looked out. It was getting -daylight.</p> - -<p>"You've got another guess coming, Sammy," he said. "We're still out on -the ocean, it looks to me. We couldn't be at a dock and be moving this -way."</p> - -<p>The motor boat in which they had so strangely been blown to sea was -still heaving up and down, though by the silence outside the boys -realized that the storm was over.</p> - -<p>"Well, we're certainly up against something," insisted Sammy. "Listen to -it bump!"</p> - -<p>There was no doubt about this. The motor boat was grinding and bumping -up against some object it had collided with on the ocean. And still the -boys, from the cabin windows, could see nothing.</p> - -<p>"Maybe," began Sammy, as his eyes grew big with wonder, "maybe it's a -whale!"</p> - -<p>"A whale!" cried Bob. "Listen to him, would you! That's as bad as the -pirate gold."</p> - -<p>"It sure is," agreed Frank, as he began to dress.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p><p>"Pooh!" exclaimed Sammy. "It might happen just the same, and if we find -a dead whale outside you fellows won't be so ready to laugh!"</p> - -<p>"Oh, a dead whale—maybe yes," agreed Bob, for more than once Sammy had -been right in his queer guesses, though a number of his wild dreams of -sensational things had not proved to be true.</p> - -<p>"Yes, or a live whale either," went on Sammy, who was following Frank's -example in getting into his clothes, as was Bob. "Didn't you ever read -of whales scraping themselves against ships to get the barnacles off -'em."</p> - -<p>"Off the ships?" asked Frank, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"No, off the whales themselves. Anyway, I think it's barnacles. It's -some kind of stuff that grows on a whale and he doesn't like it, so he -scrapes it off whenever he can. Sometimes he scrapes up against a ship, -and maybe that's what's happened now."</p> - -<p>"Well, we can soon see," spoke Frank. "But if it is a whale I hope he -doesn't scrape too hard. He might upset this boat."</p> - -<p>"Well, we lived through one night, adrift on the ocean," remarked Sammy, -as he finished dressing. "Now we'll see what it's like outside."</p> - -<p>"It's stopped raining, anyhow," went on Frank. "The storm is over."</p> - -<p>"I'm glad of it," remarked Bob. "Now we can eat breakfast without -spilling things in our laps."</p> - -<p>"That's right—it is time to eat," added Sammy.</p> - -<p>"But first let's see what we're bumping into, or what's bumping us," -suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>The boys were feeling much better now. They had been rested and calmed -by their night's rest, and they had slept more soundly than they knew, -for they were tired out. Sleep was the best thing for them, as it kept -them from worrying.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p><p>And they had good cause for worry. Three small boys, who knew little if -anything of managing a motor boat, were adrift in one on the big ocean. -The only wonder is that they were as brave as they were.</p> - -<p>"I wonder what mom thinks?" said Bob, as he slid back the bolt of the -cabin door.</p> - -<p>"She couldn't help worrying—I know mine would," spoke Sammy. "But I -think we'll be rescued to-day. Silas is most likely out looking for us -with some of his sailor friends."</p> - -<p>"Well, I hope he finds us soon," remarked Frank. "It's all right in -books, to read about being adrift at sea, but It isn't so much fun when -it comes to you. I'd rather be in Lighthouse Cove."</p> - -<p>"So would I!" cried his two chums.</p> - -<p>The three Fairview boys went out on the open deck of the <i>Skip</i>, and, as -they emerged from the cabin a cry of surprise came from all of them. For -the motor boat's stern was bumping and rubbing up against the side of a -small two-master schooner, which, with some sails set, was drifting -about on the ocean, abandoned, and seemingly as much at the mercy of the -wind and waves as was the <i>Skip</i> herself.</p> - -<p>"Would you look at that!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"A ship!" gasped Bob.</p> - -<p>"And that's your whale!" went on Frank. "Say, how did this happen?"</p> - -<p>None of the boys could answer. They looked off across a waste of waters. -Not another craft was in sight, and they could not see land. The sun -came up, seemingly out of the ocean itself, with the promise of a fair, -hot day. And those two vessels—the motor boat and the schooner had, -somehow, drifted together.</p> - -<p>That was the noise which had awakened Sammy—the gentle collision of the -craft in the ocean. Had this happened when<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> the storm was at its height -the smaller boat might have been sunk. But the storm had passed, and the -ocean only rose and fell in a gentle swell.</p> - -<p>"What brought the two together?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"The wind and the tide, I guess," said Frank. Later he learned that -objects in water have a sort of attraction for one another, as pieces of -metal are attracted to a magnet.</p> - -<p>If you will take a basin of water, and scatter some pieces of wood or -cork on top, and then take care not to move or stir the water, you will -find, in a few minutes, that the pieces have drawn themselves together. -Sometimes only one or two will do this, and again the whole number will -form a mass to float about.</p> - -<p>It is this which causes masses of driftwood to float in the form of -miniature rafts, and some scientists claim that often ships, which are -not under their own power, are thus drawn together in a collision. Some -even go so far as to say that a big war vessel, for instance, even in -motion, will draw another vessel, also in motion, toward it. And not -long ago a collision of a British warship and a merchant vessel was said -to be due to this cause.</p> - -<p>But the boys did not stop to think of that then—indeed they had heard -nothing of it.</p> - -<p>All they knew was that their motor boat was up against a much larger and -more substantial vessel, and they were glad of this, for they felt, in -case of a storm, that they could take refuge on the big schooner.</p> - -<p>"How do you s'pose it happened that she got here?" asked Sammy, -motioning toward the ship.</p> - -<p>"Is there anybody aboard?" was Bob's question.</p> - -<p>"Let's go and see," suggested Frank, and this seemed most practical of -all.</p> - -<p>It was easy to board the schooner from the rail of the motor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> boat, as -several ropes hung over the side of the larger craft, by means of which -the boys could pull themselves up.</p> - -<p>"And we'd better do it while we're together," went on Frank. "If we -drift apart we might not be able to get together again."</p> - -<p>"First let's yell, and see if there's anybody there," suggested Sammy. -"They may all be asleep, and might not like it if we went aboard."</p> - -<p>"Not very likely that they're asleep," said Frank. "Someone would be on -the lookout, anyhow. And there'd be a man steering, with the sails set -as they are."</p> - -<p>Two of the sails were indeed set, but the main sheets, or ropes, were -loose, and the boom swung back and forth with the motion of the vessel, -so that, even had the wind been blowing, she would have made little -headway. But it was now a dead calm.</p> - -<p>"Come on—yell!" suggested Sammy, and the three boys raised their voices -in a shout. They waited a moment to see if they would get an answer, but -none came.</p> - -<p>"Come on—let's go aboard!" cried Frank, as he made for the rail, to -reach a dangling rope.</p> - -<p>"Wait!" suggested Bob. "Let's tie this motor boat fast, first. We may -want to come back in her again."</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i115.jpg" alt="Let's tie the motor boat fast" /></div> - -<p class="bold">"Let's tie the motor boat fast".</p> - -<p>"Why?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Because, we don't know anything about that schooner," went on Bob. -"Maybe all her crew died from smallpox, or something like that. Maybe -she's sinking, and we wouldn't want to stay on board if she was. You -can't tell what makes her this way. Tie our boat fast, I say, and then, -if we want to, we can come back on the <i>Skip</i> if we don't like it on the -<i>Mary Ellen</i>," for that was the name of the drifting schooner, as they -could see painted under her stern.</p> - -<p>"Good idea," exclaimed Sammy. "We can live on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> <i>Skip</i> for a while, -anyhow, if it doesn't storm again. But let's have a try on this -schooner. We'll have more room there, and if it does get rough we won't -mind it so."</p> - -<p>They all agreed with this plan, and soon a rope from the motor boat was -made fast to a cable from the schooner. Then, making sure they would not -lose the <i>Skip</i>, the boys pulled themselves over the rail of the <i>Mary -Ellen</i>, and landed on her deck.</p> - -<p>They looked about them curiously. There was not a sound except the -creaking of ropes in pulley blocks, and the rattle and bang of the sails -as they swung to and fro, not being held in check by the main sheets.</p> - -<p>"There doesn't seem to be anybody here," said Bob. He spoke in a low -voice, as though someone were dead.</p> - -<p>"Not a soul," went on Sammy, in the same quiet tones.</p> - -<p>The big boom of the forward sail swung across the deck over the heads of -the boys. They ducked, but there was no need for it.</p> - -<p>"We could make that fast, anyhow," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>"That's right," agreed Bob.</p> - -<p>As my old readers know, the boys had sailed in the <i>Puff</i> before it was -wrecked, and knew a little about such matters.</p> - -<p>By hauling on a certain rope they pulled the end of the boom, or the -bottom stick to which the sail is fastened, around so that it could not -swing so far to either side. Then they did the same with the other sail.</p> - -<p>"Come on, let's take a look below," said Frank.</p> - -<p>The boys hesitated for a moment, and then started for the companionway, -or stairs, that led below.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XIV</span> <span class="smaller">THE RESCUE</span></h2> - -<p>Standing at the head of the companionway, the three Fairview boys were -in line. Then, in some strange manner, Sammy rather got behind his two -chums. Frank noticed this at once.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter?" he asked, turning to Sammy. "Are you afraid to go -down?"</p> - -<p>"No—no—of course not!" exclaimed Sammy, quickly. "But the stairs are -so narrow——"</p> - -<p>"Pooh, they're wide enough for us three," said Frank. "Here, I'll go -first if you like—I'm not afraid."</p> - -<p>"Neither am I!" retorted Sammy, as he stepped up between his chums once -more.</p> - -<p>"Let's all go down together," suggested Bob. "I don't believe that -there's anything down there, but——"</p> - -<p>Suddenly a deep, hollow groan sounded from somewhere in the lower region -of the ship.</p> - -<p>"Hark!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, we all heard it!" gasped Bob. "No need to hark! I'm going up on -deck."</p> - -<p>He turned to go back up the few steps he had come down, and Sammy went -with him. Only Frank stood there.</p> - -<p>"Say, what's the matter with you two fellows?" he asked.</p> - -<p>"But did you hear it?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Sure I heard it," said Frank. "It was——"</p> - -<p>But he did not need to describe it, for the sound came again,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> a deep, -hollow groan that seemed to vibrate all through the schooner.</p> - -<p>"There—there's someone down there!" panted Bob.</p> - -<p>"Well, what of it?" asked Frank, coolly. He did not seem nearly as -frightened as were his chums.</p> - -<p>"Then I'm not going down," went on Bob. "Maybe it's somebody hurt."</p> - -<p>"That's all the more reason why we ought to go down—he may need help, -if it's one of the sailors who couldn't get away when the others went," -insisted Frank. "Come on down."</p> - -<p>Frank's sensible talk made Bob and Sammy less afraid, and they again -took their positions by their chum's side, ready to descend the -companionway stairs.</p> - -<p>Every once in a while the groan would sound again, but the boys were not -so easily frightened now.</p> - -<p>As they went down they looked about, but they saw no signs of disorder -or confusion which they would have noticed had the captain and crew of -the schooner left in a hurry, or after some struggle. Everything was in -order, and it looked as if the sailors had just gone ashore in the -regular way, leaving the vessel to the wind and sea. Before going down -the boys had noticed that there were one or two small boats on the -davits, showing that if the crew had left the schooner at sea, they had -not taken all the rowing craft with them.</p> - -<p>"It's a queer puzzle," said Frank, as he and his chums looked about.</p> - -<p>"It sure is," agreed Bob. "I wonder——"</p> - -<p>"Hark!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>Again came that queer, groaning sound, and it was so close at hand that -the boys jumped.</p> - -<p>"The noise came from there," said Bob, pointing to the captain's -stateroom.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span></p><p>"Maybe—maybe he's tied up in there—hurt," suggested Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Maybe—and maybe not!" exclaimed Frank with vigor. "I'm going to have a -look!"</p> - -<p>His chums glanced at him admiringly. After just a moment of hesitation, -Frank tried the knob of the stateroom door. The portal swung open -easily, and the boys eagerly looked inside. They were rather -disappointed, it must be confessed, when they did not see the body of -the captain stretched out in his berth, bound with ropes. The stateroom -was empty.</p> - -<p>"Well, what—what made that groaning noise?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>The groaning sound came again, and then all three of the boys saw what -it was. A chest of drawers made fast to the side of the stateroom, had -torn loose, probably when the schooner pitched and tossed in the storm, -and this chest, swaying back and forth as the vessel rolled, scraped -against the floor, making a groaning, creaking noise that sounded a good -deal like a man in pain. Now that the boys were close to it, the sound -did not seem quite so weird, but at a little distance almost anyone -would have said it was a groan.</p> - -<p>"And that's all it was!" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes," said Frank, "that's usually the way things do turn out."</p> - -<p>For a moment the boys stood peering about the small cabin Then Bob said:</p> - -<p>"Let's look around a bit more. Maybe we can find somebody, or something, -that will tell how the vessel came to be drifting this way."</p> - -<p>They opened the other stateroom doors, but inside all was in order. The -bunks were made up, and there was no confusion.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span></p><p>"Now for the place where the crew live!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"The fo'cas'le!" exclaimed Frank. "I should think you'd know that by -this time, Sammy."</p> - -<p>But they found nothing in the quarters where the crew ate and slept to -explain the mystery. Things were not as nice there as in the cabin, but -there was no disorder that would show a hasty flight from the ship. The -boys went to the galley, which is the kitchen of a ship, but as they -found a big coal range there, and did not want to kindle a fire in that, -they decided to get their meals in their own small boat, on the oil -stove.</p> - -<p>They had now made an inspection of the <i>Mary Ellen</i>, and they knew no -more about her than at first. It was all a strange mystery of the sea.</p> - -<p>"We're going along some," said Frank, as he looked over the side.</p> - -<p>A little breeze had sprung up, and, now that the sails of the schooner -were set to catch the wind, she went ahead through the waves, pulling -the motor boat after her.</p> - -<p>"Hadn't we better steer?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, we can tie the wheel fast, while we eat," said Frank. "She'll steer -herself then, and we won't have to bother."</p> - -<p>"Which way shall we steer?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Straight ahead, I say," remarked Frank, who seemed to have taken -command. "We don't know where we are, and we don't know which way land -is, so one direction is as good as another. It will be easier to steer -straight ahead, and we may sight land that way, as well as if we set the -rudder to right or left."</p> - -<p>To this his chums agreed, and soon the wheel was tied fast, or "lashed" -to use the proper sea term. Then the boys pulled on the rope attached to -the motor boat, and brought the <i>Skip</i> alongside. They could easily get -on her raised cabin deck<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> from the schooner rail, for the larger vessel -was not very high in the water.</p> - -<p>"Say, hold on," said Frank, when they were about to go aboard. "What's -the matter with us bringing our grub up from there, and staying here? -It's safer here if it comes on to blow again, and we'll be more -comfortable. We can use the captain's cabin, and have more room to move -about."</p> - -<p>"But it will be a lot of work to cook on that big coal stove," objected -Sammy.</p> - -<p>"We won't have to. We can hoist the <i>Skip's</i> oil stove up here. It isn't -very big. There's probably oil aboard here, too. I say let's stay here."</p> - -<p>"I do, too!" cried Bob; and so it was arranged. They went aboard the -<i>Skip</i> to get food, for they did not feel that they should take the -stores of the schooner.</p> - -<p>Then the oil stove was hauled to the deck of the <i>Mary Ellen</i> by means -of a rope. Fortunately the sea was very smooth while this was being -done, so the boys had little trouble.</p> - -<p>Then, rather tired from their work, and very hungry, they cooked a late -breakfast, enjoying it very much.</p> - -<p>"This is something like!" cried Frank, as he looked about the cozy -cabin. "This is real traveling."</p> - -<p>"We're not doing much traveling—we're letting the ship sail herself," -remarked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Well, it's all we can do," said Bob. "And maybe we'll be worse off when -it comes to a blow. But if only mom knew where we were, and that we were -safe, I shouldn't mind. I'm afraid she'll worry, and get sick."</p> - -<p>"I hope not," said Frank. "But we stand a better chance now of being -picked up. Say, I never thought of it!" he cried. "We must run up a -signal of distress. If some other ship sees us now they'll never know -we're in trouble. We must run up a signal of distress."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span></p><p>"How do you do it?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"The United States flag, upside down, will do," said Sammy, promptly. He -had read of that in his books.</p> - -<p>"Yes, that will do," agreed Frank. "Come on, let's hunt for a flag."</p> - -<p>It did not take them long to find one in the locker where several signal -flags were kept, and soon they discovered the right rope by which it -could be hoisted to the masthead. It was sent up, with the stars down, -and then the boys could only wait and hope.</p> - -<p>They made sure that the <i>Skip</i> was well fastened to the stern of the -schooner, and the rest of the day they spent going about the ship. They -found a telescope, and with this they searched the horizon for a sight -of other vessels.</p> - -<p>They saw several, even without the aid of the glass, but they could not -signal to them, any more than they had already done, and the vessels -were either too far away, or else paid no attention to the reversed flag -on the mast. There was no wind to flutter it, and, naturally, it could -not very well be seen from any other ship. The boys would have to trust -to chance.</p> - -<p>The day passed, night came, and the boys prepared to spend another -period of darkness away from the cottage at Lighthouse Cove. True, they -were better off than the night before, and there was no storm, but they -very much wished to be safe with their folks again.</p> - -<p>Slowly drifting before a gentle breeze, the <i>Mary Ellen</i> made her way -over the water. The boys found lanterns and lighted them, for they knew -the danger of being run down in the night if they displayed no signals. -They sat up rather late, and watched for the lights of some passing -craft, but saw none.</p> - -<p>"I know what we can do in the morning if we're not picked up," said -Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span></p><p>"What?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Make a smudge of smoke on board here. Smoke can be seen a long way, and -maybe it will bring us help."</p> - -<p>"We'll try it," decided Bob.</p> - -<p>They went to bed, but they did not sleep as well as the night before. -Morning came, and with it a dense fog.</p> - -<p>"That's too bad!" exclaimed Frank. "No one will see us now, and we may -be in danger of a collision."</p> - -<p>"Can't we do anything?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes, we can blow a horn every once in a while, if we can find one, and -ring the ship's bell. That's what they always do in a fog."</p> - -<p>"Then let's do it!" suggested Sammy.</p> - -<p>So while the fog hung about them—a damp, white blanket—the boys tooted -the horn, and clanged the bell. This was to warn other vessels not to -run into them.</p> - -<p>But, though they listened sharply, they heard no sounds that would -indicate another vessel to be near them. They seemed all alone on the -ocean, and they were more discouraged than before.</p> - -<p>True they were not cold, for the day was warm, and they had plenty to -eat. They were in a good, stout vessel, too, and in no great danger, -unless another storm should come up.</p> - -<p>But oh! how they wanted to be back on shore again!</p> - -<p>Night came, and still the fog hung down. There was hardly a breath of -air, and the <i>Mary Ellen</i> rolled on the oily swell of the sea. The night -passed slowly, but with the morning came hope.</p> - -<p>Soon after sunrise the wind sprang up, and blew away the fog. Then the -breeze increased, and the sails filled out. The schooner went along at a -fast rate of speed.</p> - -<p>"And see!" cried Frank, "our flag shows well now. I'm sure it will be -noticed by someone, and we'll soon be rescued."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span></p><p>But the morning passed, and no rescuing ship came to them. The boys, -with hearts that were much discouraged, prepared their dinner. They had -seen several vessels, but though they waved pieces of sails to attract -attention, the other craft did not change their course. They even -shouted and blew the big fog horn, but they knew they were too far off -to be heard.</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, we'll get picked up sometime," said Frank, as cheerfully as -he could, "and we've got enough to eat for over a week."</p> - -<p>The boys were at dinner in the cabin and the schooner was going along -under the pressure from a wind that was getting more and more strong.</p> - -<p>"Pass the beans," asked Sammy, for they had plenty of the canned -variety.</p> - -<p>"Hark!" exclaimed Frank, pausing midway in reaching the dish over to his -chum. "Did you hear anything?"</p> - -<p>"I didn't," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"There it goes!" cried Frank. "Listen!"</p> - -<p>As they listened intently they all heard a dull boom, coming from -somewhere in the distance.</p> - -<p>"A cannon!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"Someone is firing at us!" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"More likely it's a signal gun!" burst out Frank. "Some ship has seen -our distress signal. Come on up deck!"</p> - -<p>He rushed from the table, followed by the others. Then, to their -surprise and delight, they saw a steamer headed directly for them, and -from her bow there shot a puff of white smoke. It was a signal gun she -was firing, to let the boys know she was coming to their rescue.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XV</span> <span class="smaller">TWO MYSTERIES CLEARED UP</span></h2> - -<p>"Heave to! Lower your sails and we'll send you a boat!"</p> - -<p>Thus came the command through a megaphone from an officer on the deck of -the steamer, which had come to a stop not far from the schooner. The -steamship had approached as close as she dared.</p> - -<p>The boys, all thought of breakfast forgotten now, crowded to the rail, -eager for their rescue.</p> - -<p>"Lower your sails!" came the command again, for the schooner was still -sweeping on.</p> - -<p>"That's right—we've got to stop!" shouted Frank. "Come on, fellows, -let's let down the sails."</p> - -<p>They knew just enough, from having sailed the <i>Puff</i>, to loosen the -proper ropes. Of course they loosened a good many wrong ones before they -got the right ones, but finally the two big sails came limply down.</p> - -<p>The <i>Mary Ellen</i> slowly lost headway, and rode gently on the surface of -the ocean.</p> - -<p>"That's right!" came the voice through the megaphone. "Stand by to throw -us a rope. I'm sending you a boat."</p> - -<p>The rail of the steamer was crowded with passengers who were much -interested in the novelty of a rescue at sea. The steamer seemed to be a -coast liner, probably engaged in the fruit trade, Frank thought.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span></p><p>In a few minutes a boat, containing several sailors, and someone in -command, swept around from the other side of the steamer. It came -straight for the schooner, the boys' hearts beating high with hope at -each stroke of the oars.</p> - -<p>"We're all right now!" cried Bob. "Oh, I hope they have a wireless -telegraph on board, so I can send word to my mother!"</p> - -<p>Loyal little chap! His first thought was of her whom he knew would be -worrying so!</p> - -<p>"Oh, there's a wireless all right," said Frank, as he pointed to the -wires strung between the signal masts of the steamer.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I'm so glad!" cried Bob, and there were tears of joy in his eyes.</p> - -<p>"But if they take us on board the steamer, what will we do with the -schooner, and the motor boat?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, we won't have to worry about that!" cried Frank. "We've had -troubles enough. Now we're going to take it easy!"</p> - -<p>The boat containing the sailors came nearer. The officer looked at the -three boys curiously. Frank had tossed a rope over the side. The -schooner's rail was so low that no accommodation ladder was needed.</p> - -<p>"Ahoy there!" called the officer, as the sailors brought the boat -broadside to, and one of them held her there by clinging to the rope. -"What schooner is that?"</p> - -<p>"The <i>Mary Ellen</i>," answered Frank.</p> - -<p>"Where from, and where bound?" asked the officer.</p> - -<p>"We don't know," replied Frank, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"You don't know! Well, who's in command?"</p> - -<p>"I guess we are," went on Frank. "We picked her up yesterday, and we've -been aboard ever since. She was abandoned."</p> - -<p>The officer uttered a whistle of surprise.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span></p><p>"I'll come aboard," he said, a moment later. "Fend off, and stand by -until I signal you," he added, to the sailors. The officer, who proved -from the lettering on his cap, to be the chief mate, was soon on the -deck of the <i>Mary Ellen</i>, and then came a series of questions.</p> - -<p>Frank and his chums told about all that had happened to them from the -time of being blown out to sea in the motor boat until they were seen by -the steamer.</p> - -<p>"It was your flag, union down, that caught our attention," the mate -said. "You're a set of plucky youngsters, and I congratulate you. Now I -suppose you'd better come aboard the steamer, unless you want to take -this schooner to port yourselves and claim the salvage money," he said -with a smile.</p> - -<p>"Indeed we do not!" exclaimed Bob. "We've had enough of her. I want to -send a wireless message to my mother—quick."</p> - -<p>"You can do that all right," said the mate. "Now I'll just have a look -about, and see what the ship's papers say. They may solve the mystery. -Then we'll go aboard the steamer."</p> - -<p>"But what about the <i>Mary Ellen</i>, and our motor boat?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, we'll look out for them," promised the mate. "I'll have the captain -send a crew aboard the schooner to work her back to port, and they'll -tow your motor boat, too. You needn't worry."</p> - -<p>The mate went to the schooner-captain's cabin, and got what papers were -there. These showed the <i>Mary Ellen</i> to be sailing from New York to -Savannah, Georgia, with a mixed cargo, but gave no cause for the -abandoning of the craft. However, that mystery was explained later.</p> - -<p>Leaving one or two of the rowers in charge of the schooner, the mate -went back with the three boys in the small boat to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> steamer. There -they were received by the captain most kindly, and in his cabin they -told their strange story.</p> - -<p>"Well, I must say you lads are plucky!" exclaimed the commander. "And -you've done yourselves a good turn, too. That schooner has a valuable -cargo, and is worth considerable herself. Of course I shall have to lay -claim, in the name of the owners of my vessel, to most of the salvage, -for my crew will take her to port. But I will see that you boys get your -proper share."</p> - -<p>Bob and his chums were most surprised by their good luck.</p> - -<p>The passengers of the steamer heard the lads' story, and made much of -the boys, who were glad indeed to be safe on a vessel that could take -them to some place whence they could reach Lighthouse Cove again.</p> - -<p>Bob's first thought was to telegraph his mother that they were safe, and -soon the wireless was cracking out a message that, when it was received, -made Mrs. Bouncer a most happy mother, for it told her that Bob and his -chums were all right.</p> - -<p>More sailors were sent aboard the schooner to work her to the nearest -port, towing the motor boat. Then the steamer started off again, with -the boys as passengers. The captain promised to land them at a port -where they could get a train back to Lighthouse Cove, and this he did, -later in the day, sending them ashore in a launch.</p> - -<p>That night Bob and his chums were home again.</p> - -<p>By turns the boys told their story.</p> - -<p>"Oh, but we were so worried!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer. "Of course it -wasn't your fault, though. Silas kept telling us that his boat would -ride out the storm, but your father has hired a large motor boat and is -off searching for you."</p> - -<p>But the good news soon reached Mr. Bouncer, for it was telegraphed all -along the coast, and he heard it when he put in at a port to get -gasolene. Then he hurried back to Barnacle Cottage.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span></p><p>"But what made the schooner abandoned?" asked Bob's father, when he had -heard the story. The boys did not know, but a day or so later that -mystery was cleared.</p> - -<p>It seemed that, just before the storm that sent Bob and his chums to -sea, the schooner had put in at a small port for a supply of fresh -water, hers having leaked away because of faulty casks. All the crew was -given shore leave, and the captain, too, went off to attend to some -business. A watchman alone was left in charge, while the <i>Mary Ellen</i> -was docked.</p> - -<p>Then came a small hurricane. A neighboring vessel broke her mooring rope -and crowded down on the schooner. The latter parted her cable and swung -out into the channel. Then the wind caught her and sent her to sea, much -as the boys had been blown. In the confusion that followed no one -thought of trying to save the <i>Mary Ellen</i> and away she went without a -soul aboard, for the watchman had fallen overboard while trying to lower -the sails. He was not, however, drowned.</p> - -<p>So, after all, there was not much of a mystery about the schooner. She -was claimed by her captain and crew, and her' owners gladly paid the -salvage money, of which our young heroes received their proper share. -Their parents put it in the bank for them.</p> - -<p>A few days later Silas Warner got back his motor boat, which had been -only slightly damaged.</p> - -<p>"Well, that's over," said Sammy, a few days after their return from -their unexpected voyage to sea. "Now if we could only find the pirate -gold, we'd be all right."</p> - -<p>"Oh, you're foolish!" exclaimed Frank. "There never was any pirate -gold."</p> - -<p>"Well, what was Professor Watson digging for?" demanded Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I don't know," said Frank, "But it wasn't gold."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span></p><p>"There he is now, digging again," said Bob, quickly, "and he's on our -beach, too. I guess now we've got a right to ask him what he's after."</p> - -<p>Rather bashfully the boys approached the old man. He paid no attention -to them, but went on digging. Suddenly he was observed to throw aside -his shovel, make a grab for something in the sand, and then he cried -out:</p> - -<p>"I have it! I have it! At last I have found it!"</p> - -<p>Eagerly the boys rushed forward. The man did not seem to notice them, -but was closely looking at something in his hand.</p> - -<p>"Have you found the pirate gold?" asked Bob, boldly.</p> - -<p>The man looked at the boys. He did not seem annoyed now.</p> - -<p>"Gold! No, I wasn't looking for gold," he said. "But I have found a very -rare kind of seashell for which I have been searching all Summer. At -last my scientific collection is complete. My search is ended!"</p> - -<p>The boys did not know what to think.</p> - -<p>"Weren't you looking for gold?" asked Sammy, much amazed.</p> - -<p>"Gold! No, I care nothing for gold. I am a college professor and from my -studies I decided that a certain rare seashell was to be found on this -coast. I came here, and dug in many places for it. I even dug at night, -for the creature that lives in this shell is said to prefer to feed at -night. But I never had any luck until now."</p> - -<p>"Then you know nothing about pirates," said Sammy, sadly.</p> - -<p>The professor looked curiously at them.</p> - -<p>"Ah, I have seen you boys before," he said, musingly.</p> - -<p>"Yes, we followed you once," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"I remember now. And I drove you away. I did not mean to be impolite, -but this shell is a very delicate one, and you were walking over the -land where I thought I might find<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> one. I feared you would crush it. -That is why I asked you to leave. But it is all right now. See, I have -the treasure," and he showed the boys a curious pink and blue shell in -his hand. To them it did not amount to much, but probably to the -scientist it was very valuable.</p> - -<p>The boys asked the professor about the night they had met him when the -lighthouse beacon was out. He explained that he had just received word -from an old fisherman, one of several he had told of his quest, with a -command to kept it secret, that some sort of shells, very like the one -the scientist wanted, might be found in a certain place. There the -professor went, taking a light with him, and it was thus the boys met -him.</p> - -<p>"And so ends that mystery," murmured Bob.</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm glad it's over," said Frank. "Maybe now you can think of -something else besides pirate gold, Sammy, and we can have some fun."</p> - -<p>"Yes, it's all over," said Sammy. "I wonder what will happen next?"</p> - -<p>And what did occur I will relate to you in the next volume of this -series, to be called "Fairview Boys on a Ranch; Or, Riding with the -Cowboys."</p> - -<p>But the days at Lighthouse Cove were not yet over. There still remained -some glorious Summer weather and the boys enjoyed it to the utmost. They -went swimming, crabbing and boating, but they never again went so near -the inlet that they were in danger of being carried out to sea. And they -neither looked for nor found the pirate gold although they did find some -very pretty seashells.</p> - -<p>And now we will take leave of the Fairview boys.</p> - -<p class="center space-above">THE END.</p> - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove, by -Frederick Gordon and R. Menel - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE *** - -***** This file should be named 52143-h.htm or 52143-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/1/4/52143/ - -Produced by Martin Pettit and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cbf44bc..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i002.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cfada68..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i002.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i021.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i021.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d7f86e9..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i021.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i037.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i037.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c24038b..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i037.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i053.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i053.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9db0b90..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i053.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i071.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i071.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c636b12..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i071.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i085.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i085.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2b85a55..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i085.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i099.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i099.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7575d3e..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i099.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/i115.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/i115.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7cd9392..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/i115.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143-h/images/logo.jpg b/old/52143-h/images/logo.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0c9c463..0000000 --- a/old/52143-h/images/logo.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52143.txt b/old/52143.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 205b980..0000000 --- a/old/52143.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4478 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove, by -Frederick Gordon and R. Menel - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - -Title: Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove - or, Carried out to Sea - -Author: Frederick Gordon - R. Menel - -Release Date: May 23, 2016 [EBook #52143] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ASCII - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE *** - - - - -Produced by Martin Pettit and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE - -OR - -CARRIED OUT TO SEA - - -BY - -FREDERICK GORDON - -AUTHOR OF "FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE," "FAIRVIEW -BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS," "FAIRVIEW BOYS -AT CAMP MYSTERY," ETC. - - -_ILLUSTRATED_ - - -CHARLES E. GRAHAM & CO. -NEWARK, N. J. NEW YORK - - -[Illustration: They crowded to the rail eager for their rescue.] - - - - -BOOKS FOR BOYS - -BY FREDERICK GORDON - -FAIRVIEW BOYS SERIES - -Illustrated. Price, per volume, 75 cents, postpaid. - - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE - Or, The Young Crusoes of Pine Island - -FAIRVIEW BOYS ON EAGLE MOUNTAIN - Or, Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS - Or, Bob Bouncer's Schooldays - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY - Or, The Old Hermit and His Secret - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE - Or, Carried Out to Sea - -FAIRVIEW BOYS ON A RANCH - Or, Riding with the Cowboys - - -COPYRIGHT, 1914, BY - -GRAHAM & MATLACK - - - - -_Fairview Boys At Lighthouse Cove_ - - - - -CONTENTS - - -CHAPTER PAGE - I. VACATION PLANS 7 - - II. AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE 15 - - III. SAMMY GETS A CLUE 23 - - IV. IN THE LIGHTHOUSE 31 - - V. THE DARK BEACON 41 - - VI. JUST IN TIME 48 - - VII. ON THE TRAIL 55 - - VIII. DRIVEN BACK 63 - - IX. IN THE BOAT 70 - - X. CARRIED OUT TO SEA 80 - - XI. IN THE STORM 90 - - XII. DRIFTING 95 - - XIII. THE ABANDONED BOAT 104 - - XIV. THE RESCUE 110 - - XV. TWO MYSTERIES CLEARED UP 120 - - -[Illustration: Logo] - - - - -Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove - -OR - -CARRIED OUT TO SEA - - - - -CHAPTER I - -VACATION PLANS - - -"Last day of school; hurray!" - -"No more lessons! No more books!" - -"Nothing but fun, from now on! I say, Frank, catch Sammy; he's going to -fall!" - -Three boys were standing together in the school yard, making merry over -the coming of the Summer vacation. The last one who spoke was a -jolly-looking lad, with a gleam of mischief in his eyes. Suddenly he put -out his foot, caught it around the ankle of one of his companions, and -gently pushed him over backwards. - -"Catch Sammy, Frank!" he cried, and the other boy grasped the toppling -one just in time. - -"I told you so!" cried the fun-loving lad, as he sprang to one side. - -"Look here, Bob Bouncer, what do you mean by that?" demanded the one who -had been pushed, as he stood upright again. "What did you do that for?" -and he started toward his companion. - -"Oh, it was only a joke," answered the one who had been called Bob -Bouncer. "I wanted to have some fun. I feel just full of fun when I -think what good times I'm going to have this Summer." - -"Huh! just because you feel good you needn't knock me all around," went -on Sammy Brown. But, though he spoke a bit crossly he could not help -smiling at Bob, who was making funny faces, and dancing about, just out -of reach. - -"I didn't hurt you," cried Bob, who was generally "cutting-up," or -thinking up some joke to play on his chums. "I waited until Frank was -there to catch you before I shoved you." - -"Humph! You're getting mighty thoughtful, all of a sudden," said Bob. -"What about it, Frank?" - -"That's right," answered the third lad. "I didn't know what he meant -when he said I was to catch you, for you were going to fall. Let up, -Bob, can't you?" - -"Yes, I won't do anything more--right away. But say, have you fellows -made any plans for this Summer?" - -"Oh, I s'pose the folks'll go way as they always do," said Frank. "My -father was talking about some place in the mountains." - -"Near a lake?" asked Bob. - -"I don't believe so. I didn't hear much about it." - -"Then I wouldn't go," said Sammy. "I want to be near the water. We're -going to a cottage near a big mountain lake, I think." - -"That sounds good!" cried Frank. "I wish we were going near a lake. I -want to learn to sail a boat the right way this year." - -"Yes, then we won't have any more shipwrecks, the way we did when we -went out in the _Puff_," laughed Bob. - -"Where are your folks going?" asked Frank, of the lad who had pushed Sam -into his arms. - -"To the seashore for ours! It's the first time since I was a little -fellow, and I'm going to have lots of fun. We're going on a sort of -cove, where there's still-water swimming, and lots of fishing and -crabbing. Not far off, is the regular ocean, but of course I won't be -allowed to do much swimming in that. I can hang on the bathing ropes, -though. Oh, I'm going to have some great times all right!" - -Bob Bouncer's two chums looked rather enviously at him. He seemed to be -going to have the best time that Summer vacation. - -About the three boys was gathered a crowd of other school children. -There was laughter, talk, and various kinds of excitement, for it was -the last day of the term, and, after some simple exercises, the building -would be closed for the long vacation. - -Because of this, discipline was a little relaxed. It was a little past -the regular opening hour, but the principal, Mr. Tetlow, did not want to -mark any one tardy on that last day, so he told the janitor not to be in -too much of a hurry to ring the bell. - -On all sides were heard questions, - -"Did you pass?" - -"Where are you going this Summer?" - -"Oh, did you hear about Henry Black?" - -"No, what about him?" - -"Why, he didn't pass again. This is the third time he'll be in the fifth -grade." - -"Oh, isn't that too bad! But you know he won't study." - -"No, he's too fond of fun." - -"Who are you talking about; Bob Bouncer?" asked someone who had just -come into the yard. - -"No, Henry Black." - -"Oh, him! Say, isn't it time we went in? I've got to speak a piece." - -"I'm glad I don't have to. I'm only in the chorus." - -And so it went on, boys and girls from the higher grammar grades down to -the kindergarten, talking and laughing together. - -Finally, when the last of the straggling pupils had reached the school, -the bell was rung, calling them into the big auditorium, where the -closing exercises would be held. These would be over about noon, and -there would be no other session. - -After the usual exercises, singing, and the reading from the Bible, Mr. -Tetlow said that there would be music and declamation. That last was a -word the smaller pupils used but little. They called it "speaking -pieces." - -Nellie Somers was in the midst of declaiming a sad little piece about a -boy who had lost his pocketbook. She recited the line: - -"Where, oh, where, is Donald's money?" - -And then, suddenly, as she paused for a moment, Bob Bouncer said in a -shrill whisper: - -"Fellows, I've got it!" - -Instantly there was laughter, and poor Nellie, up on the platform, -blushed and was unable to go on. All eyes were shifted to Bob, who -turned red, and the principal, rising suddenly, looked sternly at the -lad. - -"Who said that?" he asked, sharply. - -"I--I did, sir," stammered Bob. - -"Why did you do it? Did you want to make trouble, and cause Nellie to -feel badly--saying you had the pocketbook she spoke of?" - -"No, sir. I didn't mean anything about a pocketbook. I wasn't even -listening to what Nellie said." - -"Then why did you speak? What did you mean when you said, so we all -could hear you, that you had it?" - -Bob looked first at Frank, and then at Sammy. They, too, were wondering -what he had meant by speaking aloud in school, especially during the -closing exercises. - -"I--I meant that I had an--idea," went on Bob, blushing redder than -before. - -"Well," said Mr. Tetlow, "perhaps you meant no wrong, but the next time -you get an idea, please don't announce it to the whole school that way, -and interrupt the proceedings." He was smiling now, and Bob knew he was -forgiven. - -Bob was usually a pretty good boy in school, and the principal realized -this, for a thing like that had never happened before. Bob's explanation -was accepted, and, as it was the last day, Mr. Tetlow did not want to -punish him. - -"Steady now! Quiet down!" said Mr. Tetlow to the pupils, for many of -them showed signs of laughter again. "We will overlook it this time, -Bob, but don't do it again. You may go on, Nellie. I think Bob is sorry -he interrupted you." - -"Yes, sir, I am," said Bob, earnestly. - -Nellie smiled down at him, for he and she were good friends. Then she -finished reciting her piece, and was applauded, and the rest of the -exercises went on. Then came the giving of diplomas to those who were to -graduate from the grammar department. - -This was followed by the awarding of some prizes, and certificates of -good conduct, and for prompt and punctual attendance. Then, with a final -song by the whole school, the program ended. - -"School is dismissed, until the middle of September!" announced Mr. -Tetlow, and with happy faces the children marched out to a lively tune, -played by Miss Williams, one of the teachers. - -In the yard there was more talk and laughter, as the boys and girls -started for their homes. - -"Did you hear what Bob Bouncer said?" - -"Sure! We all did!" - -"Wasn't he terrible?" - -"And how awful Nellie must have felt! I was real sorry for her." - -"So was I. Bob was scared too, I guess." - -Thus Bob's companions talked about him. - -Frank and Sammy made their way through the crowd to the side of their -chum. - -"Say, what in the world was the matter with you?" demanded Frank. - -"Were you talking in your sleep?" Sammy wanted to know. - -"No, I wasn't," answered Bob, quickly. "It was just as I told Mr. -Tetlow. I suddenly got an idea, and, before I knew it, I popped out and -said it. I didn't even know Nellie was speaking, as I was thinking of -something else." - -"What was it?" asked Frank. - -"Yes, you may as well tell us, now that you went that far," added Sammy. - -"Well, it was an idea about our Summer vacation," went on Bob. "Our -folks are going to the seashore, you know, and I don't see any reason -why you fellows can't come too." - -"There are two good reasons," said Frank. "I have one, and Sammy has the -other." - -"None of our folks are going to the shore," said Sammy. "I wish we were, -though, for we could have lots of fun together. Now we'll be a couple of -hundred miles apart," he added, in disappointed tones. - -"And that's just what my idea is about!" exclaimed Bob. "There's no use -in us being separated. Look here, fellows, our folks are going to take -a big cottage at the shore. It's too big a house for us, for I heard mom -say so. But we couldn't get a smaller one. But I'm glad of it, for now -there's going to be room for you two fellows. So why can't you come to -the shore with me?" - -"That would be swell!" cried Frank. - -"It sure would," agreed Sammy. "But would our folks let us?" - -"The only way to find out is to ask!" declared Bob quickly. "Come on, -I'll go around with you and we'll see if they won't let you fellows go." - -"First you'd better find out if your mother will want us," suggested -Frank, who was quite practical, at times. - -"Yes, we don't want to invite ourselves," put in Sammy. "My mother will -be sure to ask first what your mother said, Bob." - -"All right, then, we can go around to my house, and I'll ask mom. But I -know she will want to have you. Say, maybe we won't have some good times -together this Summer!" - -"Where are you going?" asked Frank. - -"To a place called Lighthouse Cove. There's a lighthouse there, and -dangerous rocks, a bay, and----" - -"Any pirate treasure buried there?" asked Sammy, quickly. - -"Ho! Ho! Listen to him!" cried Frank. "There he goes again, making up a -mystery before he's even seen the place." - -"Well, there might be pirate gold!" cried Sammy, stoutly. - -"And you can have a hunt for it, if you'll only come," said Bob. - -"Oh, I'll be sure to come if the folks will let me," replied Sammy. -"Come on, let's hurry." - -The three boys left their other school companions behind, and hastened -on toward Bob's house. As Bob had said she would, his mother readily -agreed to the plan of having Sammy and Frank go to the seashore cottage -with the Bouncer family. - -"Mr. Bouncer and I will be very glad to have you," she said to Sammy and -Frank. "You will be company for Bob, and I won't have to amuse him so -much. Come, by all means. I'll write notes to each of your mothers, -inviting you, and then they'll know it will be all right." - -The notes were soon ready, and Frank and Sammy, accompanied by Bob, set -off for the homes of the two chums, to get the desired permission. - -"Let me know whether or not you can go," Mrs. Bouncer called after Frank -and Sammy. - -"We will!" they chorused. - -"And if you do go, be sure to bring picks and shovels to dig for the -pirate gold," she added, with a smile. - -"What's that!" cried Sammy, eagerly, and he started back on the run -toward Mrs. Bouncer, who stood in the doorway of her house. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE - - -"Here, where are you going, Sammy?" - -"Come back here, we want to get this thing settled!" - -Thus Frank and Bob called after their chum, who was headed toward where -Mrs. Bouncer still stood on the steps. - -"I'm going to find out about that pirate gold!" answered Sammy, never -turning around. - -"There he goes again!" cried Bob. "I wonder what mother meant by saying -that? She never told me about any pirates." - -"Maybe we'd better go back and see," suggested Frank. "We'll never get -the straight of it from Sammy." - -"All right, I'm with you," said Bob, and the two followed their chum. - -And while they are thus trying to get at the meaning of the remark made -by Mrs. Bouncer I will take just a few minutes to tell my new readers -something about the three chums and their friends, as well as about -their adventures, which I have set down in the other books of this -series. - -The first volume was named "Fairview Boys Afloat and Ashore; Or, The -Young Crusoes of Pine Island." In that I told how Frank Haven, Sammy -Brown and Bob Bouncer went sailing in the _Puff_, how the craft was -wrecked, and how the boys had to live on Pine Island for some days -before they were rescued. - -"Fairview Boys on Eagle Mountain; Or, Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt," was -the name of the second book, and in that you can read how Sammy, in -looking through an old trunk in the attic, discovered a curious -document. It told of treasure, and he and his two chums at once set off -for Eagle Mountain to discover it. - -In the third book, called "Fairview Boys and their Rivals; Or, Bob -Bouncer's Schooldays," the chums had a different form of excitement. -There was a fire in the school and a jewelry store robbery. How the -stolen things were finally recovered, and what part Bob Bouncer had in -it, you will find set down in the book. - -Then came the fourth volume, called "Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery; Or, -The Old Hermit and His Secret." In that the boys had an invitation to -visit an old hunter, who lived on a part of Pine Island they had never -explored. - -Almost as soon as they reached the island the boys discovered a curious -aged hermit, who seemed very angry at them. They also found a mysterious -room, in an old mansion, and what they found there, how they were -startled by an explosion, and what the old hermit's secret was--all that -you will find written down in the fourth book. - -The boys spent most of the Christmas vacation on Pine Island, and now -winter was over, Spring had come and gone, Summer was at hand, and they -were ready for warm weather vacation fun. - -I might add just a line or two about the boys themselves. Frank Haven -was a straightforward, every-day kind of chap, with many likeable -qualities. He was a sort of leader for the other two, they generally -looking to him for advice. - -Bob Bouncer, as you have probably guessed, was a "cut-up." He liked -jokes and fun, but was never mean in them. He could never resist playing -tricks when he got the chance. - -Sammy Brown was a queer chap. He was fond of reading stories of -adventures in strange countries, and he loved books on treasure hunting. -And it finally became so that, on the slightest chance, he would imagine -that he, himself, might one day discover a gold or diamond mine, or -stumble on some mysterious hoard of pirate gold. - -Once, as the readers of my other books know, Sammy did start on a -treasure hunt. It had an unexpected ending. And again Sammy was sure he -had discovered, on Pine Island, a band of men who made counterfeit -money. I leave you to find out for yourself what it really was he came -across. - -The boys lived in the town of Fairview, on the shores of Rainbow Lake, a -large body of water, containing many islands, the largest of them being -Pine. - -Bob and his two chums had many friends. They went to the same school, -were in the same class, and were so often together that it was strange -to see one of them out alone. - -They usually spent their Summer vacations together, and this was the -first time, in some years, that there was a prospect of parting. But Bob -believed he had gotten up a plan that would avoid this. It was this plan -which was about to be put to the test on this last day of school. - -"Wait a minute; can't you, Sammy?" called Bob to his chum, who was -hurrying toward Mrs. Bouncer. "Don't go so fast. My mother isn't going -to run away." - -"I guess maybe he thinks someone else will get ahead of him, and find -that pirate gold," suggested Frank. "It's queer your mother never told -you about it." - -"Maybe it's a joke," said Bob. "Ma likes to have fun with us, once in a -while." - -Sammy kept on until he stood in front of Bob's mother. Then he burst out -with: - -"What's that you said about a pirate, Mrs. Bouncer? Is there really one -at Lighthouse Cove? If there is I'm going to have a hunt for his gold. -Did he hide it in a cave, or bury it on the beach? And is there an old -map of it, drawn in blood?" - -Sammy Brown's eyes were shining with eagerness. - -"Oh, what a funny boy!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer, with a laugh. "I never -expected you would take me up so quickly." - -"Why, is it a joke, ma?" asked Bob. - -"I don't know whether it is or not," Mrs. Bouncer replied, and she did -not smile this time. "I really don't know why I mentioned it," she went -on. "It slipped out before I knew it." - -"Then there is really pirate gold there; is there?" asked Bob. - -"Oh, as to that I can't say. You see, boys, it's this way. I did not -intend to speak of it to you, Bob, until we got there, for I didn't want -any excitement. But, since it slipped from me, I'll tell you all I know. - -"When I went down to Lighthouse Cove, in the Spring, to see about hiring -a cottage for the Summer, I met an old sailor who had charge of some of -the places that were shut up for the Winter. After looking at several -cottages I picked out one named 'Barnacle.' It was a little too large, -but it was in an ideal spot, right in the centre of the cove shore. It -is lovely there, and near the lighthouse. - -"Well, I was talking to this old sailor, whose name is Hamp Salina, and -I asked him if Lighthouse Cove was a good place for a lively boy to have -fun--I was thinking of you, Bob." - -"What did he say?" asked Bob, eagerly. - -"Well, he said it was the finest spot a boy could wish for, and if -everything else failed to amuse him, he could spend his time digging for -the pirate gold. I asked him what he meant, and he said there was a -rumor that one of the old-time freebooters had come ashore at Lighthouse -Cove once, and buried part of his ill-gotten treasure there." - -"Did you ask him where it was buried?" asked Sammy, eagerly. - -"Oh, yes, but Hamp said he didn't know, and no one else did, though at -different times many persons had dug for the gold." - -"Did they find any?" asked Frank. - -"Never, so the old sailor said. I'm sorry, now, that I mentioned it, for -you boys won't do anything else but look for it, I'm afraid." - -"We surely will have a try for it!" declared Sammy, earnestly. - -"That's what!" exclaimed Bob. - -"We'll have to get on the right side of Hamp Salina," said Frank. "Maybe -he knows more than he's told." - -"Well, don't count too much on it, and then you won't be disappointed," -advised Mrs. Bouncer, with a smile. "You'd best run along now, Frank and -Sammy, and see if your parents will let you come with Bob." - -"If my folks don't let me go," said Sammy, slowly, as he thought of the -chance of the pirate's treasure, "if they won't let me go, I--I won't go -with them. I'll stay here in Fairview all Summer." - -"And so will I!" cried Frank. "But I'm sure they'll let us." - -Frank proved to be a good prophet. When Mrs. Haven and Mrs. Brown had -read the notes written by Mrs. Bouncer, inviting the boys to Barnacle -Cottage, they at once gave their consents. As Mrs. Brown said to Mrs. -Haven: - -"We'd never have any peace with our boys if they were alone with us, at -the places to which we are going. They'd much better be together." - -"I think so, too," said Mrs. Haven. - -So it was arranged, and Sammy and Frank were wild with delight. - -"I can go!" shouted Sammy, as he came rushing out of the house, after -his mother had consented. "I can go, Bob!" - -[Illustration: "I can go," shouted Sammy.] - -"That's fine!" - -"And we'll get that pirate gold!" added Frank, with a grin as he came -out of his house to give the good news that he, too, could go. - -"We'll, if we don't, we'll have fun anyhow," said Bob, who never had -much faith in the wild plans of Sammy Brown. - -"Oh, we'll get it!" declared Sammy. "All we need to do is to discover -the right place and dig." - -"Yes, discover it the way you discovered the treasure on Eagle -Mountain!" laughed Bob. - -"Oh, well, something came of that!" declared Sammy, in some confusion. - -"Yes, something," admitted Bob, "but not what you expected. Now let's -begin packing." - -It was some days yet before the journey to Lighthouse Cove would be -made, but the boys were so eager that they began to get ready at once. - -Finally they did start. It was half a day's journey from Fairview to the -seashore, and Lighthouse Cove was reached about three o'clock in the -afternoon. - -Mr. and Mrs. Bouncer, the servants, and the three boys drove up from the -station in a large carriage. - -"There's the cottage!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer, pointing to a large one a -little way up from the beach of the cove. "Yes, and there's old Hamp to -welcome us." - -"What, the sailor who knows about the pirate gold?" cried Sammy. "I must -see him at once!" And, without waiting for the carriage to stop, he gave -a flying leap out of it. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -SAMMY GETS A CLUE - - -"What a boy!" cried Mr. Bouncer, in dismay. - -"He'll be hurt! Stop the carriage!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer. - -"Not a bit of it, ma'am!" grunted the old man who was driving the -horses. "Boys never get hurt. They always land on their feet, like cats, -ma'am. He's all right--there he goes," he added, looking over the side -of the carriage. - -He had, however, pulled up the horses, who came to a stop. Then Mr. and -Mrs. Bouncer could see that Sammy was indeed all right. He was running -across the sand toward an aged man who was seated on an overturned boat, -not far from the Bouncer Cottage. - -"Is that the sailor who told you about the pirate gold?" Bob wanted to -know. - -"Yes," said his mother, "but----" - -"Come on!" cried Bob to Frank. "We can't let Sammy get ahead of us on -this. May we go, Mother?" - -"Oh, yes, I suppose so," she sighed, with a look at her husband, who -smiled and nodded. "We can unpack better if you boys are out of the -house, anyhow," she added. "But don't be gone too long." - -"Only long enough to find out about the pirate treasure," answered Bob, -as he and Frank got out of the carriage to run after Sammy, who was -already close to the old sailor. - -"Wait--wait for us!" called Bob to his chum, and though Sammy was in a -great hurry, he felt that, as he was the guest of Bob, it would be no -more than polite to halt until he and Frank came up. Then, together, the -three chums approached the old sailor, who was sitting calmly on the -overturned boat, smoking a short pipe. - -"Good-afternoon," greeted Bob. - -"Arternoon!" mumbled the old man. "Are you the Bouncer boys?" he asked, -turning to look at the carriage, that was drawing up at Barnacle -Cottage. - -"I'm one of 'em," answered Bob. "These are my chums." - -"Hum! I thought your mother said, when she come down to rent that -cottage, that she had three boys." - -"Oh, she says that because we're always together," explained Frank. "My -mother says the same thing." - -"Hum!" mused the old sailor. "Well, I'm glad to see you. I likes young -people--'specially boys. They make a place a bit lively, and it's dull -enough here all Winter. In Summer the cottagers come, and then it ain't -so bad. I used to be a sailor but now I fish and rent boats," he went -on, "and if you're going to hire one for the season I'll let you have a -good one." - -"Oh, we'll be sure to want a boat," Bob said, "but I guess my father -will pick it out." - -Sammy, by nods and winks, had been trying to signal to Bob to ask some -questions about the treasure, and Bob, knowing that Sammy was anxious to -hear what there was in the story, said: - -"My friend here, Sammy Brown, wants to ask you some questions, Mr. -Salina." - -"Fire away!" invited the old fisherman. "I've got a little time yet -'fore I go treading for clams. What is it?" - -"About the pirate treasure!" exclaimed Sammy, eagerly. "Mrs. Bouncer -said you told her about it. Where is it--we'd like to dig for it!" - -The old man did not answer for a few seconds. He was too busily engaged -in chuckling silently. He chuckled so hard that he took a wrong breath -on his pipe, some smoke went down his throat, and he coughed and -spluttered so wildly that the boys thought he was having a fit. But -finally he regained control of his breathing, though he was rather red -in the face, and there were tears in his eyes. - -"Excuse me," he said. "Excuse me, boys. I didn't mean to be impolite, -but I'm sorry you took so much stock in that pirate treasure yarn." - -"Isn't there any?" asked Sammy, in disappointed tones. - -"Well, there is and there isn't," said the old sailor. "That is to say -there's a _story_ all right enough, but as to there being any _treasure_ -I don't know. Nobody does, for sure, I guess." - -"Will you tell us about it?" pleaded Sammy. - -"Yes, go ahead," urged Frank. "That's the only way we'll have any -peace--to get it out of Sammy's system as soon as we can." - -"Huh! I guess you're as anxious as I am!" exclaimed Sammy. "Go ahead, -please," he added, to the sailor. - -"Well, I don't mind spinning the yarn for you," was the answer. "It -won't take long. The story's been going the rounds of this beach ever -since I can remember. To sum it all up, some of the old-timers claim -that a good many years ago a pirate ship was wrecked here." - -"Right here?" asked Sammy. - -"Well, out where you see them rocks," spoke the sailor, pointing with -the stem of his pipe. "There wasn't any lighthouse in them days, and you -wouldn't know the rocks were there, especially at high tide, when -they're covered. - -"Anyhow there was a ship wrecked on 'em. That part's true enough, for -you can see what's left of her now, at low tide. But whether she was a -pirate craft, or not, I won't undertake to say. - -"But the story is that when the crew found they couldn't get the ship -off the rocks, they took to the boats and came ashore, bringing their -booty with 'em. What the booty was the story differs on. One yarn is -that it was gold, another says silver, and a third diamonds. You can -take your choice," and the old sailor chuckled, but this time he was -careful not to swallow any smoke. - -"I'll take diamonds," said Bob, with a snicker. - -"Oh, please go on," urged Sammy, eagerly, and the sailor resumed. - -"The story goes," he went on, "that the pirate crew, having lost their -ship, buried the treasure, and went looking for another vessel. But they -never got one. They had been trying to escape from a man-o'-war when -they ran upon the rocks, and the government ship traced 'em here. The -marines came ashore, soon after the pirates landed, and attacked 'em. -That was the end of the pirates." - -The old sailor paused, and lighted his pipe, which had gone out. - -"Is--is that all?" asked Sammy, and his voice showed his disappointment. - -"That's all," answered the sailor, solemnly. - -"But what became of the pirate treasure?" asked Frank. - -"Nobody knows. It may be buried here, or the marines may have got it. My -own opinion is there never was any treasure. But lots of folks says -there was." - -"And if there was any, where would it be?" asked Bob. - -"Oh, 'most anywhere around here," answered Mr. Salina, with a wave of -his arm that took in the whole of the Cove. "You can start in and dig -where you like," he chuckled. "Nobody'll stop you. In fact there's been -a good many folks, off and on, digging around here, for quite a few -years back." - -"Did any of 'em ever find anything?" exclaimed Sammy. - -"Nary a one," laughed the old sailor. "It's all left for you boys to -find." - -"Well, maybe we can, after all," said Sammy, as he saw his chums looking -at him and smiling. "I'm going to have a try, anyhow." - -"It will take more than one Summer to dig all over this place," spoke -Bob. "And it will spoil all our other fun. I want to have some swimming, -boating and crabbing. You can have all the treasure you get, Sammy." - -Sammy did not reply. He was looking toward the rocks, where, according -to the story, the pirate vessel had been wrecked. Then he turned his -gaze toward the shore, and looked up and down the beach. Was there a -treasure buried in it? He hoped so. Yet he had been deceived so many -times before! - -"Come boys!" called Mrs. Bouncer, from the porch of the cottage. "I want -you to go to the store for some things for supper. Then, too, I want to -plan your sleeping rooms." - -"We'll see you again," said Sammy, to the old sailor. "Maybe you can -pick out the best spots for us to dig for the treasure." - -"Not me!" exclaimed the old man, quickly and sharply. "I won't have -anything to do with it. In the first place pirate gold is unlucky, and -in the second place I've seen too many folks let their business go to -rack and ruin spending their time looking for this treasure. I won't -have anything to do with it." - -Sammy looked a bit uncomfortable, and the old sailor, seeing this, -hastened to add: - -"But that needn't stop you from searching for the treasure--if there is -any. Dig as much as you like, only don't ask me to be responsible. You -ask your father about hiring a boat off me," he added to Bob. "I makes -my living--such as it is--that way--that and clamming and crabbing. It's -a hard way to earn money, but it's more sure than looking for pirate -gold," and he laughed. - -The boys raced to the cottage, where Mrs. Bouncer waited for them. The -three chums gave a hasty look about the place, and voted that it was the -finest spot for a Summer vacation they had ever seen. It was but a few -steps to the water, and they could put on their bathing suits in the -house, and run down the beach for a dip. - -Inside the cottage Mr. Bouncer and the two servants were unpacking -trunks, and getting out garments and bedding. Mrs. Bouncer gave to Bob a -list of the things she wanted from the store. The house was only a short -distance to the village, and the three boys walked along the beach to a -road that led to the town, where the stores were. - -"Well, what do you think of it now?" asked Bob. - -"Think of what?" inquired Frank. - -"The treasure." - -Frank winked, and glanced at Sammy. - -"Oh, I know what you mean," put in Sammy, quickly. "You think it's all a -joke. But I may show you fellows yet that it isn't." - -"I wish you would!" exclaimed Bob. "I'd like a little loose gold -myself." - -There were busy times at Barnacle Cottage for the next few days. Getting -settled took most of the time of Mr. and Mrs. Bouncer, and then Bob's -father had to go back to Fairview to work. He would come down, however, -for week-ends. - -Bob and his mother, with the two boy chums, soon began to enjoy life at -the shore. A large, safe rowboat had been hired from the old sailor, -and the boys were learning how to use it properly, under the instruction -of Mr. Salina. Later on he promised to take them with him when he went -fishing and clamming. - -To get hard clams the old man would go in the shallow parts of -Lighthouse Cove, and, with his bare feet, would tread in the mud until -he felt a hard clam. Then he would work it on top of his foot, raise it -out of the water and reach it in his hand, tossing it into his boat. - -Soft clams he dug for on the exposed mud flats when the tide was low. - -The boys themselves learned to catch crabs, dangling pieces of meat on -the end of strings from the dock near the cottage. When a crab grasped -the meat in his claws the boys would pull gently on the string, until -the crab was near the surface of the water. Then they would slip a net -under him and lift him into a basket, wiggling and clashing his claws. - -The Fairview Boys made inquiries about the pirate treasure story told to -them by the old man, and found that it was generally known. Few persons -believed it, however, though, in times past, many had dug in different -places for the supposed gold. - -The boys had been at Lighthouse Cove for about a week now. They had -boated, bathed and crabbed, and one night, after supper, Bob said: - -"Fellows, it's about time we took in the lighthouse. I want to see how -the lantern works." - -"So do I!" exclaimed Frank. "I was asking Mr. Salina about it. He said -an old shipmate of his kept the light, and he'd take us through any time -we wanted to go." - -"Let's go over now," suggested Sammy. "It will be more fun to see it -lighted up." - -Frank and Bob agreed with this, and as Mrs. Bouncer had no objections, -the three of them started down the beach toward the lighthouse, which -was built on a little point of land, jutting out into the Cove. - -It was just getting dusk, and the rays of the light shone out brightly. -Sammy Brown, who was walking on a little ahead of his chums, suddenly -came to a stop, in a lonely place. - -"What's the matter--crab get you?" asked Bob, with a chuckle. - -"No. Hush!" whispered Sammy. - -"What's up now?" asked Frank. "See some of those pirates?" - -Sammy turned and came back to his chums. - -"Easy!" he cautioned. "Fellows, I think I have a clue! Come over here, -but don't make any noise." - -He led them to a clump of bushes beside the path. Cautiously parting the -leaves, to make an opening, Sammy looked through. Then he drew back his -head. - -"Yes, he's there yet!" he whispered. "Take a look." - -"Who is it?" asked Bob. - -"Someone digging for pirate gold!" whispered Sammy, hoarsely. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -IN THE LIGHTHOUSE - - -For a moment Sammy's two chums looked curiously at him, and Frank seemed -about to laugh. Then Bob said: - -"You're crazy, Sammy!" - -"I am not," answered the other, quickly. "Look there!" All looked, and -did indeed see a man using a spade to dig up the earth in a secluded -spot not far from the path that led to the lighthouse. The man, who was -elderly, had a lantern on the ground beside him, and as he sunk the -spade into the earth, and brought it up, he would look closely at the -soil in the rays of the light. - -"Now what do you think?" demanded Sammy, in a triumphant whisper. "Isn't -he digging all right?" - -"Oh, he's digging," agreed Bob. "I admit that." - -"And for gold!" added Sammy. - -"Gold nothing!" exclaimed Frank with a quiet laugh. "Do you want to know -what I think, Sammy Brown?" - -"Yes; what is it?" - -"I think that man--whoever he is--is after fish worms. See, he has a tin -can there, ready to put the worms in. That's all he's doing, Sammy. He's -after bait, getting ready for a fishing trip late to-night or early -to-morrow morning." - -"That's right," said Bob. - -"Oh, is it?" asked Sammy, and he did not seem at all disturbed by what -his chums said. Then he quietly asked them: - -"Did you fellows ever hear of catching salt-water fish on angle worms? -I guess not--not around here, anyhow. Wasn't that what old Hamp Salina -told us, when we asked him about bait the other day?" - -"That's so," agreed Frank. "They don't use angle worms around here." - -"No, but they use blood worms," declared Bob, "and you have to dig for -them." - -"Yes, down on the beach, but not up as far as this from the water," -spoke Sammy earnestly, and the boys knew that he was right. Still the -man with the lantern was digging for something, and he seemed very much -in earnest about it, too. - -The boys watched him for a minute or so in silence. They had spoken in -whispers so far, and the digger had evidently not heard or seen them. He -was too busy using his shovel. - -Presently Frank spoke. - -"Say, fellows!" he exclaimed, "maybe he isn't digging for anything after -all." - -"Pooh! Can't we see?" asked Sammy. - -"No, I mean he may be _burying_ something, instead of digging it up. -He's making quite a hole." - -That was something new to think about, and for a few seconds the boys -watched to see if Frank's idea was right. - -"Do you think he's one of the pirates?" asked Bob. - -"Maybe--if there are any--but I don't believe so," answered Frank. - -"Perhaps he found some of the pirate gold, and he's burying it again -until he has a good chance to get rid of it. I wish we knew who he was." - -At that moment the old man straightened up his bent back, and gave a -sigh of relief, and also disappointment. - -"Well," the boys heard him murmur, "I'll have to dig farther on. It -isn't here, that's sure. I wonder if I will ever find it?" - -The words seemed to strike a thrill through the Fairview boys. They -looked at each other in the darkness, illuminated by the flashes of -light from the lighthouse beacon, and then, as the old man picked up his -lantern, and turned in their direction, they crouched down in the bushes -in order to remain hidden. - -But the night-digger, whoever he was, looked neither to left nor right. -He turned sharply and walked away from the boys. Then they breathed more -easily. - -"I thought sure he'd see us," said Frank. - -"So did I," added Bob. - -"Let's take a look and see what he was after," suggested Sammy. "Maybe -we can get another clue." - -He was quite excited, and so were his two chums. Usually the others did -not pay much attention to some of the queer things Sammy said and -thought, but this time it seemed as though he had stumbled on a mystery. -Still Frank was not going to give in too easily. He had not forgotten -how Sammy's "counterfeiters" had turned out. - -"I believe, after all," said Frank, "that this man will prove to be only -someone looking for a place to bury a dead cat, or something like that." - -"Oh, you get out!" exclaimed Sammy. "You're always making fun of my -ideas. Didn't you hear him say that he couldn't find it? It means the -pirate gold, I'm sure. Then he said he'd have to look farther. Does that -look like he was burying a dead cat?" - -"No, it doesn't," admitted Bob. "But let's go on to the lighthouse, and -maybe the keeper there may know something about this old man. We'll ask -him, and if he doesn't, perhaps Mr. Salina will." - -"I say--hold on!" cried Sammy, as his two chums set off down the path -again. - -"What's the matter now?" asked Frank. - -"Do you see the old man digging again?" inquired Bob. - -"No," replied Sammy, "but don't let's tell the light-keeper nor Mr. -Salina what we saw. Let's work this thing out ourselves. If there's any -money in it we don't want to have to share it among too many people." - -"Oh, you're always thinking of that!" laughed Bob. - -"And another thing," said Frank. "Suppose that old man finds the pirate -gold, Sammy, we couldn't ask him for a share in it, just because we -spied on him, and saw him dig it, could we?" - -"No," answered Sammy slowly, as he scratched his nose, which he always -did when he was thinking deeply. "No, I s'pose not. But if we saw the -old man digging, and he didn't find anything, there's nothing to prevent -our going and digging near the same spots. He probably knows _about_ -where the gold is hid. - -"But if we talk about this, and tell everybody, they'll all dig too, and -they may find the treasure ahead of us." - -"Say, you're as bad as when we went to Eagle Mountain," laughed Bob. -"But go ahead. Have your way. We won't say anything until we've done a -little more watching." - -"That's all I ask," said Sammy. - -"Then come on to the lighthouse," suggested Bob. "I'd like to see how -the machinery works." - -A little later they were knocking on the door of the small cottage built -at the side of the big tower, in the top of which flashed the warning -beacon. - -"Come in," called a girl's voice, and the boys entered. They found -themselves in a pleasant room, where sat John Floyd, the keeper of the -light, and his wife and daughter. It was evidently the daughter, a girl -of about twelve years, who had invited the boys to enter, for she rose -to welcome them, saying: - -"I think I know you--Mr. Salina told me about you, and said you might -come over to see us. Father, these are the boys from Barnacle Cottage. -This is my mother and father," she went on, with a smile. - -"I hope you don't mind us calling," spoke Bob. "Mr. Salina said visitors -were allowed, and we wanted to see how the light worked." - -"Glad to have you!" exclaimed Mr. Floyd, who was proud of his light. -"And night is the best time to come to see the machinery working. Now -let me get the straight of you--what are your names?" - -The boys introduced themselves, and learned that the daughter's name was -Lucy. She offered to take them through the tower, and led the way to the -spiral stairs. - -"Our light isn't a very big one," she said, "but it shows the ships -where the dangerous rocks are, and I suppose that's all that is needed." - -"Does it work by electricity?" asked Frank. - -"No, it's an oil light," answered Lucy. "And father has to work all -night to keep it trimmed and bright, and to see that the oil does not -give out." - -"It must be hard work," ventured Sammy. - -"It is, but father is used to it now, and likes it. He sleeps most of -the day, and stays up all night. Sometimes mother and I take the early -watches of the night to give him a rest." - -"Do you have bad storms here?" asked Bob. - -"Oh, yes, indeed, sometimes. And then father always worries for fear the -light may go out. If it did, even for a few minutes, some ship might -take the wrong course and get on the rocks. Of course the big ships -don't come up in our cove, but small ones do." - -"Has that ever happened that the light went out?" Frank asked. - -"Not since father has been in charge," said Lucy proudly, "and that is -over fourteen years, now. He came here when he was first married, and -has been here ever since." - -"What is this for?" asked Bob, as they passed a curious bit of machinery -in the tower, on their way up to the lamp itself. - -"That is what turns the lenses," the girl explained. "You see this is a -revolving light. It flashes around once every two seconds, and it is -regulated by clock-work. This big weight that hangs down is used instead -of a spring or an engine, to turn the lenses." - -"I see!" exclaimed Sammy. "It's like a cuckoo clock." - -"Yes," answered Lucy. "Father winds the weight up every day, by a crank -and windlass, as in an old-fashioned well. Then it is caught by a sort -of trigger. At night when the lantern is lighted, the weight is allowed -to slide slowly down. That pulls the wheels around and the light -flashes. - -"You see each lighthouse in this section has a different sort of -lantern. That is, some are fixed lights, some are revolving lights, some -are red and some are white. Sailors can tell, by the difference in the -lights, just where they are, even on the darkest night." - -"A lighthouse is quite important," murmured Frank. - -"We think so," laughed Lucy. - -Then the girl took them up into the light chamber itself, a small room, -with glass sides. The glass was really in the shape of lenses, as in an -automobile lamp, only it was cut in another form, called a prism, in -order to better cast out the direct rays, and magnify them. - -[Illustration: Then the girl took them up in the light chamber itself.] - -The lantern was an oil one, and it burned brightly, for it was kept -clean, and the wicks were often trimmed. The boys were rather surprised -to find that it was the glass windows, or prisms, that revolved by means -of the clockwork, and not the lantern itself. If the lantern went around -it could not be trimmed without being stopped, and this would make a -difference in the flashes, Lucy explained, and so confuse the sailors. - -At certain places in the glass sides of the lantern room, there were -blank spaces where no light could flash out, and this gave the proper -signal for that part of the coast. - -If you will take a pasteboard tube, such as calenders are mailed in, cut -two or three holes near the top, making the holes the same distance -apart, with blank spaces in between, and set this tube over a candle, -you will have a good idea of a lighthouse. Then if you will turn the -tube around, with the lighted candle still inside, you will get the -effect of a flashing light, such as Bob and his chums were shown. - -They were much interested, and stayed in the tower some time, watching -Mr. Floyd trim and fill the lamp, to keep it bright. - -"This is certainly great!" exclaimed Frank, when they were ready to -leave. - -"It sure is," agreed Sammy. Then he was unable to restrain his curiosity -in spite of what he had agreed with his chums. "Say," he asked -earnestly, when they were down in the living-room again, "did you ever -hear anything of the pirate gold buried around here, Mr. Floyd?" - -The light-keeper laughed. - -"Oh, yes, I've heard," he said, "but I don't take any stock in it." - -Sammy was not discouraged by this answer. - -"Did you ever dig for it?" he persisted. - -"Oh, yes, when I first came here, and heard the story, I was young and -foolish, and I had my try at it," answered the light-keeper, with a -chuckle. "But I soon gave it up. I could make more money, and be sure of -it, by tending the light." - -"Does anybody ever dig for it now?" asked Frank, giving Sammy a meaning -look. - -"Oh, yes, now and then someone has a try at it," went on Mr. Floyd. -"They think they can discover some new clues, I suppose. But I don't -take any stock in 'em. Well, boys, come again--always glad to see you," -he added, as they went out. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -THE DARK BEACON - - -"Well, what do you think now, Sammy?" asked Bob, as they walked toward -Barnacle Cottage in the evening darkness. - -"What about?" asked Sammy, sharply. - -"About your treasure." - -"I think just the same as I did before," answered Sammy, promptly, "and -that is that it's around here. Didn't we see that man digging for it?" - -"Say, you'd believe the moon was made of green cheese if someone told -you," said Frank. - -"Oh, I would; eh?" returned Sammy. "Well, you just wait and see." - -The days that followed were happy ones for the Fairview boys. They went -in swimming so often that Mrs. Bouncer said they might as well live in -their bathing suits, and save their other clothes. They often went -clamming, bringing home big baskets filled with the soft kind. - -These clams were steamed, or made into toothsome chowder, which the boys -enjoyed very much. - -At other times the lads would take their own safe boat, and go to the -distant sand flats, where they learned to tread for hard clams. - -Crabbing was one of their chief delights, and many a basketfull of the -clashing, clawing creatures they pulled out of the waters of Lighthouse -Cove. Sometimes they would get soft crabs, by hauling the seine, or -straight net, along shore. - -But, though they made many inquiries, or, rather, though Sammy did, he -could not find out who the old man was whom they had seen digging by -lantern-light. They had had a fairly good view of him, but in the Cove -settlement were many old fishermen and sailors, who looked much the same -as that elderly man did, so they were not sure which of the many -villagers he might have been; and they did not like to ask. - -One day, after the three chums had been rowing for some distance around -the Cove, Sammy Brown suddenly exclaimed: - -"I say, fellows, I've got an idea!" - -"What, another one?" laughed Bob. "You're full of them lately." - -"Let's hear it, anyhow," suggested Frank. "Can we have any fun by it, -Sammy?" - -"Sure. What do you say to rowing ashore, and digging a pirate cave." - -"You mean dig a cave and look for the pirate gold?" asked Bob. - -"No, I mean let's play we're pirates ourselves. We can go over to one of -those sand dunes, and hollow out a hole in the side of it. We can make -believe that's where we live, and we can make a fire of driftwood." - -"Say, that'll be great!" cried Bob. "And we can bring some grub there -and cook it! Sammy, you're all right!" - -"Even if he can't find the pirate gold!" added Frank, gaily. - -Filled with the new idea, the boys hastily rowed up on shore, and soon -were digging into the side of the hill of sand, making a place where -they could go in and imagine all sorts of delightful things. - -The sand dune was one of many along the shore, and on top grew some -rank grass that held the sand together. Working with broad pieces of -driftwood for shovels, the boys soon had quite a hole in the sand pile. -It was large enough to hold all three of them, and they were eagerly -talking of the fun they would have. - -"We can come over here and stay all night!" said Bob. - -"Sure, it will be plenty warm enough, with a blanket or two," added -Sammy. - -"And we can cook our meals right on the beach, in front of the cave," -added Frank. "That's the way the pirates used to do." - -"Then we'd better get some driftwood for the fire," suggested Sammy. -"We've got the hole almost large enough." - -They collected quite a pile of the wood that was strewn along the beach, -and then, after sitting in the "pirate cave" for a while, they rowed -back to Barnacle Cottage, to get some food which they intended to cook -over their campfire that evening. - -After some objection, Mrs. Bouncer said the boys might cook a meal -there, but she would not let them sleep all night in the sand cave. - -"It's sure to be damp," she said, "and, though you boys might not think -so, I can't have you catching colds. Play there in the daytime as much -as you like, but you can't sleep there." - -With this they had to be content. They had lots of fun building the -fire, and toasting frankforters over the coals. Sometimes the sausages -would drop off the pointed sticks, and fall into the ashes, but Bob and -his chums brushed the dirt off and went on eating as if nothing had -happened. - -They played in the cave for several days, and some of the other boys -from nearby cottages joined with them, so the three chums became the -leaders of a regular "pirate band." - -One afternoon, however, something happened that put a stop to this fun. -Sammy and his two chums had gone alone to the cave, and they had taken -with them shovels to enlarge it, as it was getting too crowded on -account of so many boys wanting to enter it. - -"We'll make a dandy big cave, while we're at it!" boasted Sammy. - -The three chums dug away for some time, and finally Bob said: - -"That's enough, fellows. If we go too far back, and the sand should cave -in, we'd never get out." - -"That's right," chimed in Frank. - -"Pooh! You fellows are scared!" exclaimed Sammy. "I'm going to dig it -farther back. You two get some driftwood, and pile it out in front. -We'll have a roaring big fire to-night." - -Frank and Bob went up and down the beach, gathering sticks, and bits of -broken boards, while Sammy continued to dig away inside the cave. Frank -and Bob made several trips to and fro, and the pile of wood was growing. - -Finally, as they neared the cave, on what they said would be their last -trip, as they were tired, Frank cried: - -"Look! The sand has caved in!" - -"So it has!" exclaimed Bob. - -They looked toward where the mouth of the cave had been. It was closed, -and the sand was still sliding somewhat, showing that the accident must -have happened only a little while before. - -"And Sam--Sammy!" gasped Bob. - -"He's in there!" faltered Frank. - -"And we've got to get him out--quick!" cried Bob. - -They both glanced up and down the beach. No one was in sight. -Fortunately they had brought their shovels out of the cave. - -With these they began digging at what had been the entrance to the -"pirate" cavern. Shovelful after shovelful of sand they tossed aside, -until their arms ached, but they would not stop. - -"We must get him out!" gasped Bob. - -"Before he smothers!" added Frank. - -They worked with a will. Luckily for Sammy, he had been coming out of -the cave when the accident happened. Otherwise he would have been so far -back that he might never have been gotten out alive. - -As it was Frank and Bob had dug for only a few seconds before they saw a -hand moving about in the sand. Then another hand appeared beside it, and -they stopped digging. - -"There he is!" cried Bob, joyfully. - -"And he's alive!" said Frank. "Use your fingers--not your shovel--we -might hurt him." - -With their hands they now scooped away the sand, and in a few seconds -Sammy's face appeared. He was gasping for breath, and looked quite pale -and frightened, but with the help of his chums he was soon completely -uncovered. - -"Are you all right?" asked Bob. - -"I--I guess so," answered Sammy, shaking the sand from his clothes, and -feeling all over himself to make sure. "Yes," he went on. "Nothing's -busted." - -"How did it happen?" asked Frank. - -"I don't know. All of a sudden the sand began to slide. I got scared and -ran for the front of the cave. Then the front door went shut, you might -say, and I was caught. I held my breath, made a little place for my -mouth and nose, and waited. I knew you fellows would get me out, and -you did." - -"We were scared, though," confessed Bob. - -"I guess we won't go in any more sand caves," said Frank. And they did -not. It was a lucky escape for Sammy, and Mrs. Bouncer, when she heard -about it, made strong objections to the boys playing pirates in that -fashion. - -But there were plenty of other chances for the chums of Barnacle Cottage -to have good times, and they enjoyed their stay at Lighthouse Cove to -the utmost. - -Sammy still persisted in believing that pirate gold was buried somewhere -about, and he dug in many places, when he could slip away from his -chums, but without success. He kept a lookout for the man with the -lantern, but could not meet him, as far as he could tell, though he saw -many whom he thought was the person he sought. Nor did he make any -inquiries for fear of being laughed at. - -One evening, about a week after Sammy had been caught in the "pirate -cave," he proposed, after supper, that he and his chums pay another -visit to the lighthouse. He had taken some pictures of it with his -camera, and wanted to show them to Lucy and her parents. - -"All right, I'm with you," said Frank, and Bob nodded to show that he -would go, too. - -They saw the light flashing, as they started from the cottage, and -struck across the now lonely beach. The rays of light came every so -often, flashing over their heads, and out toward the inlet, where the -sea and cove met. - -Suddenly, as they walked along, Bob glanced up and exclaimed: - -"See! The light has gone out!" - -They all looked up. - -"So it has!" faltered Frank. - -"The lighthouse is dark!" said Sammy slowly. "Fellows, it must be -wreckers at work! They've overpowered the light-keeper, and put out the -light to draw some ship in toward shore so she'll be wrecked! That's -what it is--wreckers! Come on!" - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -JUST IN TIME - - -For a moment Bob and Frank were so startled at not seeing the light -flashing out, as it always did after sunset, that they did not stop to -think what Sammy's excited words meant. They raced on after him, toward -the entrance to the lighthouse, intent only on finding out what was the -matter. - -"It sure is wreckers," Sammy kept saying over and over again. "Some bad -men are trying to get the ship on the rocks, and when she breaks up -they'll get all the valuable cargo that comes ashore!" - -Then Frank paid some attention to what his chum was saying. - -"Hold on there!" he cried. "That's some more of your wild imagination, -Sammy." - -"Wreckers! Who ever heard of wreckers?" Bob wanted to know. - -"I did!" exclaimed Sammy. "I'm sure they've put out the light!" - -"How could they?" asked Bob. "Mr. Floyd has been there all the while." - -"They--they overpowered him," said Sammy, hesitating a bit over the long -word. - -"Well, what about his wife and daughter?" Frank wanted to know. "I guess -they wouldn't let any wreckers put out the light." - -"Mrs. Floyd and Lucy are away this evening," said Sammy. "I saw them go -past our cottage. They said they were going to the moving picture show -over in town, and would stay all night with some relations. It's all a -plot--that's what it is! The wreckers knew Mr. Floyd would be alone." - -Bob and Frank looked at Sammy a little differently now. It was true that -the wife and daughter of the light-keeper had gone away. The two chums -remembered this, now that Sammy had recalled it to their mind. The -keeper was alone in the tower. - -And certainly something must have happened, for the light was out, and -as the boys raced toward it they glanced up, every now and then, hoping -to see the bright beams flashing. But the tower remained in darkness. - -As they ran on they saw a light flashing along the path ahead of them. -It swayed from side to side, and flickered so the boys easily guessed -that it was a lantern being carried by someone. - -"There they are now!" cried Sammy, in much excitement. - -"Who?" Bob wanted to know. - -"Some of the wreckers! They're making signals! Don't let them see us!" - -Frank and Bob hesitated. They did not know what to do, and, though they -knew that Sammy was much given to imagination, and to excitement, this -time he might be partly right, they thought. - -"What shall we do?" asked Frank. - -"Let's get away from here," proposed Bob. - -"Come on--run!" advised Frank. - -"It's too late--they've seen us and they're coming right this way!" -exclaimed Bob. The person with the lantern, whoever he might be, was -headed directly for the boys, and coming on swiftly. - -"Fellows, we can't run," called Sammy. "Whatever happens we've either -got to give the alarm about the light being out, or we've got to go to -the tower, see what's the matter, and start it ourselves. We've got to -stand our ground." - -"Maybe someone from the town will notice that the light's out, and come -over," suggested Frank, hopefully. - -"They can't see the light from the back, over in town," put in Sammy. -"You can only see it from in front, or at either side, the way we are -now. The back part of the light is always dark." - -"That's so," admitted Bob. "But what can we do? Who is this coming with -the lantern?" - -They did not have long to wait to find out, for the figure, with the -swinging light, was running now. The path was narrow and the boys -stepped to one side, slacking in their pace a little. - -Then, as the stranger with the lantern came opposite them, Sammy and his -chums gasped in astonishment. - -The person who ran past them, paying no more attention to the boys than -if he had not seen them, was an old man, and as he flashed by, Sammy -cried: - -"It's the same one--the man who was digging for the gold!" - -"So it was!" exclaimed Frank. - -"Let's take after him," suggested Bob. "Maybe he's seen the trouble at -the lighthouse and is going for help. Then we won't have to go. Let's -follow him!" - -"No, don't!" cried Sammy Brown, catching hold of Bob's coat. - -"Why not?" - -"Because it's dangerous!" - -"Dangerous? How?" - -"That man's one of the wreckers!" whispered Sammy, hoarsely. "He's just -been to the lighthouse to put out the lamp, and now he's going to join -his gang. We'd better not interfere with him." - -"Why, I thought you said he was looking for pirate gold!" exclaimed Bob. - -"Well, I guess I was mistaken," admitted Sammy. The boys had come to a -stop, and were looking after the man who was running away from them, his -lantern bobbing from side to side. "I'm sure he's a wrecker anyhow," -went on Sammy. "He looked like a desperate character!" - -"Say, I don't believe you know what you're talking about!" burst out -Frank. "Maybe that man has seen the trouble at the lighthouse, and has -gone for help. But, for all that, I think we'd better go there -ourselves, and see if we can do anything." - -"Maybe you're right," admitted Sammy, as he looked in the direction of -the bobbing lantern. "Anyhow I don't believe it would be a good thing to -follow that man. Say, we're getting as badly mixed up in a mystery here, -as we were on Pine Island." - -"Yes, and maybe it will turn out just as easy," spoke Frank. - -"No, I'm sure something is going to happen here," insisted Sammy. "The -light being out, for one thing, shows that, and the old man digging for -pirate gold is another. But come on, fellows. Some ship may go on the -rocks while we're talking here." - -"There's no storm, that's one good thing," murmured Bob. "I thought -wreckers only worked during a storm." - -"Maybe they do things different here," said Sammy. "Come on!" - -They started again toward the lighthouse, now and then looking up toward -the tall tower in the hope of seeing the flashing beacon. But all was -still darkness, save for the twinkling stars in the sky. - -[Illustration: They started again toward the lighthouse.] - -They reached the cottage connected with the lighthouse. The door was -open, but all was dark inside. For a moment the boys hesitated. -Afterwards Bob and Frank admitted that they were thinking of the same -thing Sammy was--that perhaps there was a trap, and that the wreckers -were waiting for them. - -Finally Frank called: - -"Hello, Mr. Floyd! Are you there? What's the matter? Why isn't the light -going?" - -At first only a groaning voice answered them, and then they heard the -stronger tones of the light-keeper crying out: - -"Oh, thank Providence someone has come! Quick, boys, you're just in -time! Light the lamp! Never mind me! Light the lantern!" - -"Are you hurt?" asked Bob. - -"Did the wreckers attack you?" cried Sammy. - -"Wreckers! Good land, no!" shouted the light-keeper. "I fell down -stairs, and I guess my leg is broken. And when I fell I hit against the -lever that puts out the lantern, and that made it all dark. And I've -been lying here ever since, calling for help, but no one heard me. I -didn't know what to do, for I can't seem to move. - -"But you're just in time, boys. Come in, and I'll tell you how to light -the lantern. Hurry, or some ship may go on the rocks! Wreckers? Good -land, what made you think of them?" - -"Fooled again!" murmured Sammy Brown, as he and his companions entered -the cottage. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -ON THE TRAIL - - -"Where are you?" called Bob to the light-keeper, as the boys went into -the living room. All was so dark they could see nothing. - -"Right here, at the foot of the stairs," answered Mr. Floyd. "I haven't -been able to move since my fall." - -"Are you badly hurt?" asked Frank. - -"I don't know, but I hope not. Never mind about me, though. You must set -the lantern going, for I can't do it. That is most important. I have -never yet let it go out--this is the first time; but I could not help -that." - -"Wait, I'll strike a match," said Sammy. "Then we can see what we are -doing." - -The tiny glow illuminated the room, and the boys could see the -light-keeper huddled in a heap at the foot of the stairs that led to the -tower, at the top of which was the big lantern. - -"There's a lamp on the table," said the aged man, pointing to it. "Light -that, and then go up to the lantern. Do you think you can light it?" - -"I guess so," answered Bob. "Your daughter showed us how it was done." - -"That's good. She little knew how soon you might have to do it. But if -you think you can't do it, you must go for help. My wife and daughter -have gone to visit relations, and will be away all night, but you can -get some of the fishermen; they will know how to light the lantern." - -"Oh, I'm sure we can do it!" exclaimed Frank. "Lucy showed us just how -it was done." - -"I'm thankful for that," went on the light-keeper. "Now, boys, don't -bother with me!" he went on, as they advanced toward him. "Just get up -aloft and set the lantern going. You see I have an arrangement so I can -put it out from down here, without going all the way up. That's to save -me climbing the stairs in the morning. - -"Well, I was coming down, from having trimmed it, a little while ago, -when I slipped. I put out my hand to save myself, and, by mistake I -grabbed hold of the wire I had rigged up to put out the light. It put it -out, all right, and here I've lain ever since, not knowing what to do. -Oh, it was terrible! - -"I couldn't tell when anyone would come, being all alone as I was. I -called and called, but no one heard me." - -The boys thought of the strange figure of the old man, with the lantern, -running away, and they wondered if he had heard and had not heeded. - -"I couldn't tell what moment some ship might go on the rocks," continued -the light-keeper. "For the sailors, not seeing the light, might get off -their course. I was glad there was no storm, for that would have made it -much worse. - -"But never mind about that now. You're here, thank Providence, and you -can start the light going before it's too late." - -"Come on!" cried Bob, and with a lantern which they had found and set -aglow, to light them up the dark stairs of the tower, the three boys -ascended. First, however, they had in spite of his protests, made Mr. -Floyd more comfortable, by putting a pillow under his head, and -straightening him out. They did not want to move him too much for fear -one of his legs might be broken. - -Up into the lantern tower the lads went. Then with hands that trembled -a little, they ignited the big wicks, first having raised the -extinguishers that Mr. Floyd had accidentally pulled down over them in -his fall. - -The machinery, that made the glass prisms turn, was still in motion, not -having been stopped since it was set going early in the evening, so with -this the boys had nothing to do. As soon as they had lighted the -lantern, the welcome flash went sparkling out over the waters of the -cove, to warn captains off the dangerous rocks. - -"And now we'd better get down and help Mr. Floyd," said Bob, when they -had made sure that the lantern was going all right, and would not smoke. -"I guess we'd better get a doctor." - -"I think so, too," added Frank. "Too bad about your wreckers, Sammy," he -went on, with a laugh. - -"Aw, quit your fooling!" exclaimed the lad who sometimes let his -imagination run away with him. "Something like that might have happened, -anyhow." - -"Yes, it _might_," admitted Bob. "But it _didn't_." - -"I'm sure there's something queer about that man with the lantern we -saw," continued Sammy. "He's after that pirate gold, I'm positive." - -"Well, he does act queer," admitted Frank. "We can have a try for his -secret, as soon as we get this lighthouse business fixed up." - -"We do seem to run into the queerest things," remarked Bob. "If it isn't -one thing it's another." - -"I like it!" exclaimed Sammy, who was always on the lookout for -something to happen. That it seldom did take place never discouraged -him. - -"Well, is everything all right?" asked Mr. Floyd, as the boys came down -stairs. - -"Yes," answered Frank. "The lantern is going all right." - -"And now we'll look after you," went on Bob. "Are you badly hurt?" - -"I can't tell. Best have the doctor look me over, I guess. I'm more -comfortable since you boys came. It isn't so much for myself that I -care, but the light depends on me. Uncle Sam trusts me to keep it going, -no matter what happens, and I've got to do it. If I get knocked out -someone else will have to look after it." - -"We'll go for a doctor," said Sammy. - -"Yes, and maybe we'd better go tell your wife and daughter what has -happened," suggested Frank. "They'll want to be with you." - -"I guess that would be a good plan," agreed the light-keeper. "They -ought to be here, for I'm afraid I won't be able to get up and down -stairs much for a while." - -While the boys were planning who should stay at the lighthouse, and who -should go for the physician, hurried footsteps were heard outside, and a -number of fishermen and sailors came crowding in. They were much -surprised at what they saw. - -"Look here!" exclaimed one big lobsterman, "what's all this here about, -John Floyd?" - -"We saw the light out," added another, "and we made up a committee to -come and investigate." - -"Thinking there was trouble," put in a third. - -"Yes, thinking there was trouble," agreed the second speaker. "Has these -boys been up to any tricks?" and he looked at the three chums -suspiciously. - -"Indeed they have not!" exclaimed Mr. Floyd, earnestly. "If it hadn't -been for these boys the light would be out yet. And if you fellows had -come a little quicker, instead of waiting to form a committee, it might -have been better." - -"Well, we didn't notice, until a few minutes ago, that the light wasn't -flashin'," said a clam dealer. "You know you can't see it very well from -shore. But Ted Knowlton was out in his boat after eels, and he noticed -right away that there wasn't any flash. So he rowed in as fast as he -could and told us." - -"But the boys got here first, and I'm mighty thankful to 'em!" exclaimed -Mr. Floyd. "Howsomever, now that you men are here, you might lift me up -on that lounge, and then get the doctor." - -"And we'll go for your wife!" said Bob. "We can do that, if you'll tell -us where she is." - -The light-keeper gave them the directions for finding Mrs. Floyd and -Lucy, who had gone to a relative about two miles away. The boys left, -after waiting to learn that, in the opinion of the fishermen, Mr. -Floyd's leg was only sprained, and not broken. - -Stopping at Barnacle Cottage to tell Mrs. Bouncer what had happened, and -where they were going, Bob and his chums hurried to where Mrs. Floyd was -staying. She and Lucy were at first much alarmed at the news, but were -soon told that nothing serious had happened. They at once returned to -the lighthouse with the boys. - -The keeper was feeling much better now, and the doctor had bandaged his -leg. He would be unable to walk around for several days, it was said, -and some of the fishermen agreed to come and help with the heavier work -about the lighthouse until Mr. Floyd was able to be about. - -"Well, that's over," remarked Bob, as he and his chums went back to -Barnacle Cottage again. "Quite some little excitement for a while; eh?" - -"That's right," agreed Frank. - -"But it isn't over yet," said Sammy Brown. - -"Why not?" asked Bob. "That is unless you're going to have a look for -the wreckers, Sammy," and he nudged Frank, to show that he was only -joking. - -"Humph! Wreckers, yes!" exclaimed Sammy. "If there _had_ happened to be -any you fellows would have been glad enough to want part of the credit. -But as long as there wasn't, you can only poke fun at me." - -"Oh, we didn't mean anything!" said Bob, quickly. "I was only joking, -Sammy. Go ahead; tell us what you mean by it not being over yet." - -"I mean we haven't found out who that queer old man is with the -lantern," said Sammy. "I'm sure there's some mystery about him." - -"Pirate gold; do you mean?" asked Frank. - -"Well, I'm not going to say that again, and have you fellows laugh at -me!" exclaimed the lad who did so much sensational thinking. "But that -man is after something around here." - -"I agree on that," said Frank. - -"But what is it?" asked Bob. - -"That's what we've got to find out!" declared Sammy, promptly. "Fellows, -what's the matter with us trailing that queer man, until we find out all -about him." - -"Trail him?" questioned Bob. - -"Yes," went on Sammy. "We'll try to find where he lives, and what he is -after." - -"And why he goes about nights with a lantern," added Frank. He and Bob -were now as much interested as was Sammy, and they were eager to help -their chum clear up the mystery. - -Getting to the cottage, they found company had come to call on Mr. and -Mrs. Bouncer, and before the boys went to bed they had to tell all about -their adventure at the lighthouse. - -"My, you boys certainly do things!" exclaimed one of the callers. - -"Yes, too much, sometimes," said Mrs. Bouncer, with a sigh, as she -looked at her son and his chums. "I never know what they'll be up to -next. That's one reason I rather dreaded coming here. I didn't so much -mind it at home, for though they were out on Rainbow Lake much of the -time, there was a limit to that water. But here, so near the big -ocean,--I don't know. I'm always afraid they'll be carried out to sea!" -and she shivered slightly, as if from some unknown fear. - -"Carried out to sea!" exclaimed Bob. "How could we be? We never go as -far as the inlet." - -"And I hope you never will!" exclaimed his mother. - -The boys told more in detail of their doings at the lighthouse and then -were sent off to bed, for the hour was growing late. They only made a -mention of the strange man with the lantern, whom they had passed in the -darkness, and they did not tell of their intention to get on his trail, -and try to find out who he was and what he was after. They thought that, -had they spoken of him, permission to seek after his secret might not be -given. - -"Well, what's on the program this morning?" asked Bob, after breakfast -one day. - -"Me for a swim, as soon as it gets a little warmer," decided Frank, for -the morning was a bit chilly. - -"I'm with you!" agreed Bob. - -"Can't you boys get a few crabs first?" asked Mrs. Bouncer. "I'd like -some to make a salad. The tide is right now; isn't it?" - -"Yes, it's coming in, and they always bite best on the incoming tide," -replied Bob, who had learned that from an old fisherman. "What do you -say, fellows; shall we go crabbing?" - -"Sure," agreed his chums. "We can swim later." - -Accordingly with crab nets, pieces of meat tied on strings for bait, -and a deep basket in which to keep the catch, the boys set off in their -boat, for the other side of the cove, since there the larger crabs could -be gotten. - -They had good luck, and were busy pulling in some large ones, with big -blue claws, when Bob suddenly called to his companions: - -"Look, there he is now!" - -They glanced up, to see, some distance back from the beach, in a clump -of scrub evergreen trees, a man digging. - -"There's our man of mystery!" exclaimed Sammy. "Let's trail him, -fellows!" - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -DRIVEN BACK - - -Sammy's two chums did not answer for a minute. They looked at each -other, and then Frank exclaimed: - -"I've got a bite, and a big one, too. Pass that net down here!" - -For a moment the prospect of catching another crab was greater even than -the chance of finding out something about the strange man. Bob handed -his companion the net, and Frank cautiously began pulling up on the cord -to which was fastened the chunk of meat-bait. With his other hand he -held the net ready to plunge into the water, and scoop up his prize. - -"There he is!" cried Bob, whose bait was not then being taken. "Get him, -Frank!" - -"I will. Don't get excited and rock the boat. I'll have him in a -minute!" - -"There!" exclaimed Sammy, whose attention was also taken away from the -man for the moment. "Net him!" - -Frank plunged the net into the water, trying to get it under the crab, -which was clinging to the meat with its claws. But the boy was not quite -quick enough, or else he hit the crab with the iron ring of the net, for -the creature suddenly let go, and with a quick motion of his broad, -swimming flippers went scurrying off into the depths again. - -"Oh, he got away!" cried Bob, in disappointed tones. - -"You weren't quite quick enough," spoke Sammy. - -"I was so! You jiggled my arm, and made the net hit him!" exclaimed -Frank. "It was the biggest one I had, too; a yellow fellow, full of -meat!" and he gazed reproachfully at Sammy. - -"I did not jiggle your arm!" returned Sammy. - -"You did so!" - -"I did not!" - -"Fellows, if we're going to trail that mysterious man, let's do it, and -not scrap," suggested Bob. This was as near to a quarrel as any of the -chums ever got. Frank's little burst of temper was soon over. - -"Well, we've got enough crabs, anyhow," he said, looking into the basket -where they were kept, covered with seaweed, so the sun would not make -them die. For crabs are only good when cooked alive, or soon after they -have died. Otherwise they are very likely to be poisonous. - -"Yes, we have a good mess," agreed Sammy. "I didn't mean to jiggle your -arm, if I did, Frank," he went on. "I'll give you one of my crabs to pay -for it, if you say so." - -"You will not! They all go in the same kettle, anyhow. Say, Bob," he -went on, "what's the matter with having a clam roast out on the beach -some night?" - -"Sure we can," said Bob. "We'll build a fire, roast clams and boil -crabs, and have some of the other fellows over. That'll be fun!" - -"It sure will," agreed Sammy. "But say, fellows, what about him?" and he -nodded in the direction of the old man in the clump of evergreen trees. -He was still digging away, seemingly paying no attention to anything, or -anyone, around him. "Are we going to follow him, or not?" - -"We can't follow him, when he isn't going anywhere," observed Bob. - -"No, but he may start off at any time," said Sammy. "We could tell -where he lives, and then we could find out something about him. As it is -now we can't even tell who he is, and there are a lot of men who look -like him around Lighthouse Cove." - -"Well, what's your plan?" asked Frank, carefully pulling up his crab -line, in the hope that the big fellow had again taken the meat. One was -there, but it was so small that he shook it off, not wanting to net it. - -"I say let's row close over to where he is," suggested Sammy. "Then, -when he starts off, we can go ashore and follow him." - -"Maybe he's got a boat hidden somewhere on shore," said Bob. "Let's take -a look." - -The boys scanned the beach, but could see nothing of another craft. -Meanwhile, the old man in the clump of evergreens continued to dig away. -He paid no attention to the boys. - -"Tell you what it is," said Sammy, at length, "we've got to play foxy -now. We don't want any more of that hermit business." - -"What do you mean?" asked Frank. - -"Well, you know what happened when we followed that old man on Pine -Island. He pushed us over a cliff into a snow bank." - -"Ha! Ha!" laughed Bob. - -"What's the matter?" demanded Sammy. "I don't see anything to laugh at." - -"You don't? Well, there's no snow bank, for one thing." - -"Well, you now what I mean," said Sammy. "He might make trouble for us. -I say we'd better be careful." - -"That's what I say, too," agreed Frank. "Now the best way, I think, will -be to let our boat drift. We can pretend we are crabbing, but we can -pull up the anchor, and the tide will take us nearly to where he is -digging. He can't say anything, if we do that, for we have a right to -drift." - -"Yes, and then we can see if he has a boat," added Sammy. "I guess -that's the best plan. But what about these crabs, Bob? Won't your mother -want them for dinner?" - -"No, she's going to make them into a salad for supper. We fellows will -have to cook 'em, and pick 'em out of the shells, I expect. There will -be time enough when we get in. Let's trail this old man now." - -Accordingly the small pronged anchor, that held the boat from drifting -while the crabbing was going on, was hauled up, and put in the bow. -Then, while pretending to be busy with their crab lines, the boys let -their craft drift with the tide over toward the shore. - -The old man was still digging away, but he had moved his position and -was now deeper in the clump of trees. - -"I'm sure he's after pirate gold!" exclaimed Sammy, in a whisper, for he -knew sounds carry very distinctly over water, and he did not want the -digging man to hear him. - -"He's after something, right enough," agreed Frank. "What it is we can -find out later." - -"There's a boat, anyhow," put in Bob, pointing to one partly hidden -under some brush and seaweed not far from the shore. - -"That's right!" cried Sammy. "That shows he came from some other part of -the Cove. We'll follow him!" - -But, for the present, the man did not show any sign of being about to -leave the clump of trees. He was digging away, paying no attention to -anything around him, save to glance up now and then. If he saw the boys, -as he must have done, he gave no sign. - -Bob and his two chums, now that they were where they wanted to get, -again threw the anchor overboard, and resumed their crabbing. But luck -was not so good here, the boat being too near shore. However, they -wanted an excuse for remaining near the man, and this gave them one. - -"Here he comes!" suddenly exclaimed Sammy, as he wound up his crab line -for future use. "Get ready now, boys." - -The others looked up. Coming down toward the beach was the strange old -man. Over his shoulder were a pick and a shovel, and in one hand he -carried a square wooden box, with a strap for a handle. - -"What do you s'pose he has that for?" asked Frank. - -"To put the gold in," said Sammy, promptly, "or else that holds the map, -and directions for finding the treasure." - -"The directions can't be very good," spoke Bob, "for he's been digging -in lots of places, far apart, too. I think that gold business is all -bosh!" - -"Hush! He'll hear you!" cautioned Frank, for the old man had looked -sharply in the direction of the boys. - -"I don't care," spoke Bob. "This is a free country." - -The boys had again pulled up anchor, and taken to the oars. They were -pulling out from shore now. The old man went to where the other boat was -partly hidden, and slid it down over the sand to the water. Then, -putting in his tools and the box, he entered the craft himself, and -began to row up toward the head of the Cove. - -"Come on!" said Sammy, to his chums. "We've got to follow." - -"Do you think we'd better?" asked Frank. - -"Sure; why not?" was the answer. "We've got to find out about him; -haven't we?" - -To this the others had no objection. They were as interested, now, as -Sammy was in solving the mystery. So, when the old man rowed off, more -quickly than the boys supposed one of his age could do, they followed, -but at a distance. - -The day was a fine one, there was only a little wind, and the tide was -with them. - -"But it won't be so easy rowing back against the current," said Bob. - -"Oh, don't worry," advised Sammy, eager to find where the strange man -lived. - -They did not have long to wait. A little later, after turning a point of -land, the man rowed up to a small dock, in front of a small house, and, -tieing his boat there, got out and went up the slope. - -"Come on!" called Sammy, a moment later. "Let's go ashore." - -"Maybe he won't like it," suggested Frank. - -"Oh, he won't care," was the answer. "He's seen us following him, and he -didn't say anything. Come on." - -Rather against their will, Frank and Bob followed Sammy. He sent the -boat up on the beach, and threw out the anchor in the sand to hold the -craft against the tide. Then, followed by his chums, he approached the -small cottage. - -But if the boys imagined the aged man was going to witness their -approach in silence they were disappointed. He reached his porch, and -putting his pick, shovel and box down there, turned and hurried to meet -Sammy and his chums. - -"Did you boys want to see me?" he asked, and his voice was rather stern. -He did not speak like the fishermen of the cove, but more, as Sammy said -afterward, like Mr. Tetlow, the school principal, when he was angry. - -"We--we just wanted to see," began Sammy, uncertain whether or not to -tell his suspicions about the pirate gold, and to be allowed a share in -the secret. - -"Now look here, boys!" interrupted the aged man, sternly. "I don't want -to be harsh toward you, but you must get away from here. I said nothing -when you followed me, not thinking you would land on my property. This -is private land, and there has been a 'no trespass' sign up, but it has -fallen down. I will put it up again. I want no strangers around here. - -"My neighbors around me know this, and do not bother me. It is probably -because you are strangers that you have come here. Now I will not have -it. Later on I may be glad to see you, but now I must ask you to leave!" - -He stood looking at the boys sternly. They had been ordered away, and -there was nothing for them to do but to obey. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -IN THE BOAT - - -"Well, we didn't find out anything." - -"No, we had all our trouble for our pains." - -"But we know where he lives--that's something we didn't know before." - -This last was said by Sammy Brown. His two chums, Bob and Frank, had -made the other remarks. The boys were rowing toward Barnacle Cottage, -having been practically driven away from the place to which they had -trailed the strange old man. His manner had been severe and stern, yet -the boys knew he had right and justice on his side. - -"We couldn't do anything but go," said Bob. "He could have had us -arrested for trespass if we didn't." - -"That's right," admitted Frank. - -"Well, I didn't think he'd be quite so sharp," said Sammy, after a -moment. "I thought he was a sort of simple old man, like some of the -fishermen around here." - -"But he's a lot different," spoke Frank. "Did you see how his eyes -snapped, when he told us to get away?" - -"I should say I did!" answered Bob. "He was real angry." - -"But he spoke good enough to us," said Sammy. "I s'pose it was a crazy -idea to go there in broad daylight, when he was at home. Next time I'll -go at night, or when he's away." - -"What! Are you going again?" cried Bob. - -"I should say I am! I'm going to get at the bottom of this yet!" -declared Sammy. - -"And when you do get to the bottom, it will fall out, just as it always -does, and you'll have all your trouble for nothing," said Frank, with a -laugh. - -"Will I? Well, I'll see," answered Sammy, confidently. "I'm sure that -man is trying to hide something." - -"I thought he was trying to _find_ something, from what you said at -first--the pirates' gold!" laughed Bob. - -"Oh, you know what I mean," returned Sammy. "Quit your fooling!" - -They rowed on in silence for a few minutes, and suddenly Frank, who was -in the stern, gave a loud yell. - -"What's the matter?" asked Bob. "See a shark?" - -"No, but a crab's got my toe! Look out! They're getting out of the -basket!" - -He jumped up on the stern seat, holding out one bare foot--to the big -toe of which a large crab was clinging with his strong claw. - -"Take him off!" cried Frank, dancing about. - -[Illustration: "Take him off!" cried Frank.] - -"Take him off yourself!" exclaimed Sammy. "Think we want to get nipped?" - -"Look out! You'll upset the boat!" cautioned Bob. "Keep still; can't -you?" - -"No, I can't, and I guess you couldn't, either, with a big blue-claw -crab nipping you!" cried Frank. "Ouch! Get him off; can't you!" - -He was trying to do this for himself, but the crab, that was one of the -biggest caught, had one claw free, and every time Frank reached out his -hand to grasp the creature, and pull it from his toe, the crab would -open his other claw, and wave it around threateningly. So Frank was a -bit cautious about taking hold of the creature. - -"Look out! The others are getting out!" cried Sammy, as he glanced at -the basket of crabs. - -It was only too true. The boys had paid no attention to their catch for -some time, and the crabs had pushed their way up from beneath the -seaweed, and were crawling over the edge. - -"Clap something on top of the basket!" cried Sammy. "Hand me that board, -Frank." - -"Can't! I've got troubles of my own! Ouch, let go, can't you!" he cried -to the crab, which did not seem to want to do this. - -"Wow! One's got me, too!" exclaimed Bob, turning quickly about. - -"Smash him against the side of the boat!" advised Sammy to Frank, and, -seeing this was good advice, the boy did so. - -Crack went the hard crab against the gunwale, and the claw by which it -had been clinging to Frank's toe came off. Crabs claws often come loose -and new ones grow on again. So the creature was not much hurt. - -"Whew! That's better!" gasped Frank, as he opened the nippers of the -claw that still clung to his toe, in spite of the fact that it was -severed from the body of the crab. - -"Let go, can't you!" cried Bob, to the crab nipping him. - -"Try Frank's trick," advised Sammy. - -Bob did so, but the result was not exactly what was looked for. - -The boy hit the crab, that had hold of his hand, such a blow against the -side of the boat, that, losing his balance, Bob leaned too far over. - -"Look out! You'll upset us!" cried Frank, who was nursing his nipped -toe. - -It was too late. The boat tilted, and, aided by the tide and the frantic -efforts of the boys to prevent it, over went the craft, spilling out the -three chums, crabs, and all. Then such confusion as there was! - -Gasping and choking, from their sudden and unexpected bath, the boys -came to the surface of the water. They were all good swimmers, and, -fortunately had on only thin shirts and light trousers--almost bathing -suits, in fact. - -"Grab the oars!" called Sammy. - -"And don't let the boat get away!" added Frank. - -"There go the crabs!" shouted Bob, as he saw the basket containing their -catch sail away on the tide, the crabs scrambling out, rejoicing in -their unexpected liberty. - -"Too late! We can't save 'em--have to catch some more!" called Bob. "Get -the oars and the boat!" - -"Going to right the boat?" asked Frank, as he swam to get a drifting -oar. - -"No, it's too much work here. Let's swim with her down to the lighthouse -dock, pull her out there, and dump the water out. Then we can row home." - -It was good advice; and the best and easiest thing to do. With the -recovered oars, and their crab nets, the boys swam along toward shore, -pushing the boat ahead of them. The water was not over their heads, and -soon they could wade. - -"Had an upset; didn't you?" called Mr. Floyd, the light-keeper, who was -at the dock as the boys came along. - -"Sort of," admitted Sammy, ruefully. - -"Lost all our crabs, too," added Frank. - -"Yes, and mother won't like it," put in Bob. "She was counting on 'em -for salad for supper." - -"Never mind, as long as you're all right," advised the light-keeper. -"And as for crabs, I've been amusing myself catching a mess this -morning. I've got more than I want, and I'll let you have some. Big ones -they are, too. Where you been?" - -They told him, and then, in a sudden burst of confidence, Sammy related -about the strange old man, and told of how he had driven them away from -his cottage. - -Mr. Floyd chuckled, as he limped about on a cane, for he was able to be -around now, though he could not go up and down the tower stairs. - -"So you ran afoul of the professor; did you?" he asked with a laugh. - -"Is that who he is--a professor?" asked Sammy eagerly. "What is he -always digging for--pirate's gold?" - -"Land love you, boy, I don't know; and no one else does, as far as I can -learn," said Mr. Floyd. "He's been in these parts for some time now, but -nobody knows what his game is. Digging; eh? Yes, he's always doing -that." - -"At night, too," said Sammy. - -"Yes, night don't seem to make any difference to him," admitted the -lighthouse-keeper. "He's a mighty queer man." - -"What's his name?" asked Frank, binding a bit of his handkerchief about -his crab-bitten toe, while he and the other boys sat in the warm sun on -the dock, letting their clothes dry. - -"Watson--Professor Watson he calls himself," said Mr. Floyd. "No one -seems to know much about him. He doesn't mix with us folks much--lives -all alone in that cabin." - -"Do you really think he might be looking for the pirate gold?" asked -Sammy eagerly. - -"Well, he might be," admitted Mr. Floyd. "Lots of wiser folks, and some -more foolish than he seems to be, have dug for it--but never found it. -He might have the craze, too. But I wouldn't advise you boys to bother -him too much." - -"Is he dangerous?" asked Bob. - -"No, I wouldn't go so far as to say that," replied the light-keeper, -slowly. "But you know you have no right to go on his land, and he might -have you arrested." - -"Did he ever have anyone taken in?" Frank wanted to know. - -"No, but he sued Nate Hardon, his next door neighbor, because Nate's -dog dug up the garden. And the funny thing of it was that the professor -didn't have anything planted in that garden, as far as any of us could -find out. He just got provoked because Nate's dog dug some holes, and he -sued Nate. He won his case, too, and got six cents damage." - -"Six cents! Is that all?" asked Sammy, in surprise. - -"Oh, he didn't want the money," explained the light-keeper. "He just -wanted the courts to say that Nate's dog had no right in the garden, and -it hadn't, I s'pose. Anyhow, Nate had to build his fence over. - -"But the professor, as we call him, is sure a queer character. I don't -know what he's after, but whatever it is he hasn't found it. We folks -leave him alone, and I guess you boys had better, too." - -"Did you see him around here that night, when the light went out?" asked -Sammy. - -"No, I didn't," answered Mr. Floyd, and Sammy did not say why he had -asked. - -The boys' clothing was nearly dry now, and, the water having been -emptied from the boat, which was pulled up on the beach, the lads -started for Barnacle Cottage. - -They took with them some of the crabs Mr. Floyd gave them, so their -accident did not prevent Mr. Bouncer from having a fine supper that -night. The boys built a fire out of doors, and boiled the crabs, -afterward picking the meat out of the shells. - -Talk as they did over the queer encounter with Professor Watson they -could not come to any understanding of what object he might have in -digging in various places. Sammy still stuck to his idea about the -buried gold, but his chums did not agree with him. - -Vacation days at Lighthouse Cove were slipping by. Already about half -the Summer was gone, and the boys were counting with regret on the time -when they would have to go back to Fairview and to school. - -They had more good times this Summer, so they said, than ever before. -They went in swimming, rowed about in their boat, and caught so many -fish and crabs that Mr. Bouncer said he could feel the salt water -running out of his ears. - -More visits were paid to the lighthouse, too, and the boys were always -welcome there since they had done Mr. Floyd such a service. The -light-keeper told them many fine stories. - -At other times they went to the ocean beach, where the surf was heavier -than in the cove near Barnacle Cottage. They were allowed to bathe in -the shallow part of the ocean, near shore, but Mr. or Mrs. Bouncer kept -sharp watch over them at such times. - -The boys made many acquaintances among the fishermen and sailors who -lived at the Cove, and were often taken out in the boats. Best of all -they liked to go with Silas Warner, who had a large motor boat, one that -was able to go through the inlet, and out to sea, when it was not too -rough. Silas often went on long fishing trips, and when he only cruised -about in the Cove Mrs. Bouncer allowed her son and his chums to go with -him. - -But she would never consent to their going out on the open ocean, though -Silas often offered to take them. His boat, the _Skip_, had a cabin, and -several persons could sleep aboard her. - -"The ocean is too dangerous for the boys," said Mrs. Bouncer. - -One day when Bob and his chums were down at Silas Warner's dock, -watching him fix the engine in the _Skip_, he called to them: - -"Want to come for a ride?" - -"Sure. Where you going?" asked Bob. - -"Oh, down by the bridge. I've got to get some supplies. I won't be very -long." - -The bridge was down near the inlet, where the ocean and cove met, -surging their waters together over the sand bar. It was a fine, long -trip. - -"I guess we can go," said Bob, as he ran to ask his mother. She gave her -permission, for the day was a fine, calm one, although hot, and she knew -the boys would enjoy the trip on the water. - -Soon, in the big motor boat, with Silas at the wheel, the boys started -off in great delight. They waved good-bye to Mrs. Bouncer, who stood in -the doorway of the cottage. Little did the boys think how much would -happen before they saw her again. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -CARRIED OUT TO SEA - - -"May I steer a bit?" asked Bob, when he and his chums had ridden in the -big motor boat some distance down the cove toward the bridge, that was -not far from the inlet. - -"I guess so," answered Silas. "There aren't many craft about now, and I -don't believe you'll run into anybody." - -"I wish I'd asked him," murmured Sammy to Frank. "But I didn't think -he'd let us." - -All the boys were eager to take the wheel. - -"We can take turns," said Bob, generously. Now that he had permission to -do what he had long been anxious to, he was not going to be selfish. -"Can't we take turns, Silas?" he asked. - -"Oh, I guess so," was the good-natured answer. "It'll be as good a time -as any to give you boys some points on steering. No telling when you may -have a boat of your own." - -"I wanted my father to get one this year," said Bob, "only he said I was -too young to run it, and he didn't have time. When I go back I'll tell -him I can steer a boat, and maybe he'll get one." - -"I hope he does!" cried Sammy, with visions of what fine fun he and his -chums would have in a power boat of their own. - -"Well, there's a heap sight more to learn about a motor boat than just -steering it," said Silas, with a grin, "though maybe steering comes -first. Now I'll show you what to do, and how to do it. Of course I can't -show you all the different twists and turns of the channel now--it would -take too long to learn them. But I can show you how to steer a boat, how -to keep her straight, and how to go to port or starboard, or left and -right, as they say now." - -The three boys gathered about him as he sat at the wheel, which was made -fast to a bulkhead, or partition just outside the cabin. The cabin of -the _Skip_ took up about half of the boat, the forward part. The after -part was an open space, beneath the floor of which was the motor running -in a sort of cockpit. - -The motor was covered with a cover, or hatch, as it is called, and when -this was in place you could not see the machinery, though it was running -beneath your feet. - -The cabin was of good size, and had small bunks in it that could be made -up into beds. There were also lockers for food and water, and a small -oil stove on which Silas cooked when he went off on fishing trips. In -fact the _Skip_ was a snug little craft. - -"This wheel is what is called a sea wheel," went on Silas, beginning his -steering lesson. - -"Aren't all wheels sea wheels?" asked Bob. - -"No, on some motor boats there are what are called land-lubber wheels." - -"What's the difference?" asked Frank. - -"It's easy to remember, once you've heard it," said Silas. "A -land-lubber wheel turns in the same direction you want the boat to -steer. For instance, if you want to go to the left you twist the wheel -toward your left hand, and if you want to go to the right you twist it -to the right. - -"But a sea wheel is just the opposite from this. With that, if you want -your boat to go to the left, you turn the wheel to the right, and if -you want to go to the right you twist the wheel to the left." - -"I should think you'd get all twisted up!" exclaimed Sammy. - -"Well, you might, at first, but once you've learned to use a sea wheel -you won't want any other," went on Silas. "I'm not saying but what it -might not have been better at the start, for every boat to have a wheel -you could turn in the direction you wanted to go, but as long as they -have sea wheels you might as well learn that way. Now we'll begin." - -In turn he let the boys handle the wheel, sending the boat this way and -that, until they found how quickly the _Skip_ responded to her rudder. - -At first each of the lads got a little confused, and turned the wheel -the wrong way. But soon they remembered, and when Silas, pretending he -was the captain, ordered them to go to the right or left they did do it -without any trouble. - -They passed several other boats from time to time, and Silas showed how -to get by them without getting too far out of the channel, or without -passing too close to the other craft. There was a compressed air whistle -on the _Skip_ and the boys took great delight in blowing this. - -"It's a heap more fun on a trip like this than trailing that queer old -Professor Watson!" exclaimed Bob. - -"That's right," said Frank. "I don't believe we'll bother with him any -more." - -"No, I guess I was wrong about that pirate gold," admitted Sammy, and -his chums laughed, for this was the first time he had ever given up. But -he was so interested in the motor boat that he thought of little else. - -The trip to the bridge, just above the inlet, was rather a long one, but -the boys enjoyed every bit of it, and they were sorry when the _Skip_ -pulled up to a dock, and Silas announced that he would stay there for -some time, buying supplies for himself, and for a number of other -fishermen, who had asked him to obtain things for them. There was a -general store at the bridge--a store which supplied many sailors and -fishermen with the things they needed for their work. - -While waiting for Silas, the boys went ashore and wandered about the -little settlement about the store. Finally the fisherman came out and -said: - -"Boys, I find I've got to go down near the inlet after some stuff. Now -you said your folks didn't want you to go there, and I don't want to -take you when Mrs. Bouncer said you weren't to go. So you'd better stay -here until I come back. I won't be long." - -"Oh, that's no fun!" exclaimed Bob. - -"I wonder if we couldn't go," suggested Frank. - -"There isn't any danger; is there?" asked Sammy. - -"I don't think so," answered Silas, "but them women folks has their own -opinions. I never go agin 'em." - -The three chums were much disappointed, when Bob saw a telephone on the -wall. - -"That's the thing!" he cried. "I'm going to telephone my mother at the -cottage, and ask her if we can't go. I'll tell her there's no danger." - -"And you can tell her I said so," put in Silas, for he liked the -Fairview boys, and wanted to give them the pleasures of the trip. - -Bob was soon talking to his mother over the wire, and, after some -hesitation, she said the boys might make the longer trip. And, on the -suggestion of Silas, Bob said they would probably not be home for -dinner, since it would be late. - -"We'll just get a lunch on my boat," said Silas. "I've got plenty to -eat, and a stove to cook it on." - -"Oh, that will be fine!" cried Sammy, and the others agreed with him. - -So it was arranged, and a little later the _Skip_ went under the bridge, -and pointed her bow toward the broader and deeper waters that led to the -inlet. - -It was about three miles to where the waters of the ocean and Cove met, -and the channel was so twisting, on account of the shifting sands, that -Silas did not like to let the boys steer. So he held the wheel himself. - -From time to time, as the boat went on Silas would raise the hatch -cover, and look at the throbbing motor, to see that it was running all -right. Once in a while he would oil it. The boys looked on with interest -when he did this, and asked many questions. - -Silas explained how he had to spin the flywheel around to start the -motor, and how he turned on the spark and gasolene. Sometimes, he said, -the motor would start when the electric switch was closed, without the -flywheel being turned by hand. - -Now and then, as the _Skip_ went along, Silas would look up at the sky, -and shake his head as though in doubt. - -"What's the matter?" asked Sammy, after a bit. - -"I don't like the looks of the weather," was the answer. "It looks to me -as though we were in for a heavy thunderstorm." - -"They're not dangerous; are they?" asked Bob. - -"Oh, well, not specially so. But down here, near the inlet, the wind -sometimes blows pretty strong, and when the tide's running out, as it is -now, there's a powerful current. I almost wish I hadn't brought you boys -along." - -"Oh, we're not afraid," said Frank with confidence. "The _Skip_ is a -good boat; isn't she?" - -"There's none better afloat, for her size," said Silas proudly. "I've -ridden out many a gale in her down in the big bay. But of course the -ocean is different. However, I'll just hurry through and maybe we can -get back before she blows too hard. I think we'll have a bite to eat -now, for we may not get time later. Here, one of you boys take the -wheel. There's a straight course now, and I'll get out the things and -make some coffee." - -This was soon done, and the boys sat about, eating the sandwiches Silas -made. They were having the time of their lives, and the fact that in the -West a big bank of black clouds was gathering, from which now and then -lightning flashed, did not worry them. They were sure they would get -back all right. - -[Illustration: The boys sat about eating the sandwiches.] - -Silas had to stop at a small dock, not far from the inlet, where an old -sailmaker had his shanty. The fisherman was to call for a sail for one -of his neighbors. - -Silas made fast the _Skip_ in a hurry, and, leaping out on the dock, -called to the boys: - -"Wait here until I come back. I won't be long. Then we'll head for -Lighthouse Cove." - -"All right," answered Bob. "We'll be all right." - -The darkness had increased because of the clouds, and now a strong wind -sprang up. It whipped the waters of the channel into whitecaps, and -this, with the strong tide that was running, made the _Skip_ strain hard -at her mooring rope. - -The wind blew harder, and then with a sudden outbreak of fury the storm -broke, the rain coming down in such torrents that the boys could not see -the shanty of the sailmaker. - -"Get in the cabin!" cried Sammy. - -"That's right!" yelled Frank. "We'll be soaked here!" - -They tumbled into the cabin, which was below the level of the cockpit -deck, and pulled the sliding doors shut. - -"Now we're all snug--let her rain!" cried Bob. - -And rain it did. The pelting drops made so much noise on the cabin roof -that the boys had to shout to make each other hear. The thunder was -terrific, and the bright lightning cut through the blackness that was -almost as dark as night. - -"Say, this boat is bobbing some!" suddenly exclaimed Frank. - -Indeed the _Skip_ was in violent motion, and the boys did not know what -to make of it. She swung about, and then brought up suddenly as the rope -tightened. - -Then, all at once, there was a violent jerk, and the boat swung about -more than ever. - -"I hope that rope holds!" cried Sammy. - -"So do I!" exclaimed Bob. "What if it should break?" - -Then the _Skip_ seemed to swing entirely around, and a moment later she -raced off through the storm, tossing violently up and down on the waves. -The boys heard confused shouts above the noise of the storm. - -"What is it?" cried Sammy. - -"Something has happened!" yelled Frank. - -"I'm going to have a look," said Bob resolutely, as he slid back one of -the cabin doors. The burst of wind and rain in his face almost drove him -within again, but he went out into the little open space. - -Then his worst fears were realized. The _Skip_ had broken away from her -dock, and was racing before the wind and tide down the channel toward -the inlet. - -Bob could just make out, on the end of the dock, the figure of an -excited man, waving his hands to him. But what he said could not be -heard. Bob was sure the man was Silas. - -"What is it--what's happened?" called Frank. - -"We've broken loose!" shouted Bob, coming back into the cabin. Even in -those few seconds he had been drenched with the rain. - -"Broken loose from where?" asked Sammy. - -"From the dock. We're adrift!" - -"Adrift! Where are we going?" gasped Sammy and Frank together. - -"We're being carried out to sea, I guess," answered Bob, and there was -fear in his voice, much as he tried to hide it. - -Meanwhile the _Skip_, at the mercy of the wind and tide, was being -carried faster and faster out toward the inlet that led to the great -ocean. - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -IN THE STORM - - -Despairingly the boys, shut up in the cabin of the _Skip_, looked at one -another. They had to cling to the bunks and the sides of the bulkheads -in order not to be thrown down, so violent was the motion of the craft. -Sometimes the boat would whirl completely around, and after this had -happened several times Bob cried: - -"Fellows, there's only one thing to do!" - -"What's that?" asked Sammy. "Can we do anything?" - -"We've just got to," said Frank. "If we don't we'll sink pretty soon, -and be drowned. I think I know what you mean, Bob. You mean we've got to -steer the boat?" - -"That's it! She's going every which way now, and there's no telling what -may happen. If we can get at the wheel we may be able to send her -ashore." - -"But the wheel is outside!" cried Sammy. "We can't go out in this storm -to steer." - -"Oh, yes we can, if we had to," said Bob. "But we don't have to. There's -another wheel inside the cabin, you know." - -And so there was, Silas having arranged this for his own comfort in -stormy weather. The _Skip_ could be guided either by the wheel outside -in what might be called the cockpit, or from within the cabin. And in -the cabin, up forward, were small windows, or bull's-eyes, through which -the steersman could look. - -"If we could only start the motor we could turn around and go back," -suggested Frank, while they were trying to make their way up front, to -the wheel, without banging against the sides of the cabin. - -"Oh, we'd better not try to monkey with that--especially in this storm," -said Bob. "If we can only keep the boat straight ahead, so it won't -whirl around so, and make us dizzy, it will be a good thing. After the -storm we can try the motor." - -"But by that time we will be out to sea!" cried Sammy. - -"We can't help it," came from Bob. "Here goes now, to see what sort of a -course I can steer." - -The wheel was twisting and turning this way and that as the waves moved -the rudder. Bob turned the spokes until he had the one with ring marks -on it exactly upright in front of him. When this had been done, Silas -had told them, the rudder was straight, and the boat would go straight -ahead. - -And, as Bob looked from the bull's-eye, he saw nothing ahead but a -straight course of water. The waves had been whipped into whitecaps of -foam, but there seemed no obstruction, and with the wind blowing them, -and the tide carrying them, all the Fairview boys could do was to keep -on. - -"It sure is some storm!" murmured Frank, as a louder clash of thunder -than any before seemed to shake the very boat. - -"And we're in it!" murmured Sammy. "What will our folks think?" - -"Oh, Silas will tell them," said Bob, as he braced his feet apart to -meet the heaving motion of the boat. - -"Yes, he's left behind there on the dock," said Frank. "Our rope must -have broke when the wind and waves banged us about that time. He'll tell -the folks all right." - -"But that won't stop mother from worrying," said Bob, anxiously, for he -disliked to cause her or his father anxiety. - -"They'll come after us," remarked Sammy. "Silas will get another boat -and come for us." - -"If he can find us," spoke Bob. "But if we go out to sea I don't believe -he can easily pick us up." - -"Oh, he will, sooner or later," went on Frank, who did not seem to feel -so badly about it as Bob did. "Don't get scared." - -"Oh, I'm not exactly scared," replied Bob, stoutly, "for this is a good -boat. But a storm at sea is no fun!" - -"Maybe it isn't storming out there," suggested Sammy. - -"It's sure to be," declared Bob. "But we've got to make the best of it. -We've got plenty to eat, that's one good thing." - -"And a good place to stay," added Frank. "We're better off than when the -_Puff_ was wrecked." - -"But we may be wrecked yet," put in Bob. - -"Oh, cheer up!" advised Sammy. "We'll be laughing at this in a few -hours." - -"But how dark it is!" said Bob. "It's almost like night!" - -"We've got lanterns here," suggested Frank. "Why not light them? And it -might be good to show a light outside, so no other boat will run into -us." - -"Let's do it!" cried Bob. "I'll steer and you fellows can light up. -There are some oilskin suits in one of the lockers, Silas said. You can -put one on when you go outside." - -The lighting of the lanterns made the boys feel less gloomy, and when -Frank and Sammy, putting on the yellow oilskin coats, went outside and -hung lanterns there, the boat was in less danger of collision. - -"Say, we must be almost to the ocean," cried Frank, as he and Sammy came -into the cabin again. - -"What makes you think so?" asked Bob. - -"Because I can hear the booming of the surf. We'll be out on it in a -little while." - -"Well, we can't help it," said Bob. "I thought we were there long ago, -the way we bobbed up and down." - -"Yes, it is rough," said Sammy. "We must be almost in the inlet, -fellows. Silas said it was always dangerous to go through there." - -"But not so bad on the out-going tide," spoke Bob, quickly, and he was -glad he had remembered that point. "I guess we'll make it all right," he -added, hopefully. - -The storm did not grow less. The lightning still flashed and the thunder -rolled, while the rain came down in torrents. The cockpit was fitted -with scuppers, or openings that allowed the water to run off, or -otherwise the _Skip_ would have been flooded. As it was, some water came -into the cabin under the doors. But the boys did not mind this. - -Had the motor been running they would have reached the inlet, and gone -through it into the open sea, some time before. But as it was they were -only blowing and drifting along. - -"Well, there's no use staying this way," said Frank, after a bit, as he -felt of his wet clothes. "I'm going to take off some of them and get -dry. We can light the oil stove." - -"And get something to eat," added Sammy. - -Somehow or other this idea seemed to make all the boys feel better. The -stove was soon glowing and the cabin was cozy and warm. Indeed, but for -the fact that they were storm-driven out to sea, and were so alarmed, -the boys would have enjoyed the adventure. - -They took off some of their wet garments, and hung them near the oil -stove to get dry. There were blankets in the bunks, and in these they -wrapped themselves up. Frank put some coffee on the stove to warm, -though the boys, as a rule did not take this beverage. Still they -thought it might prevent their taking cold. - -Little could now be seen outside, for to the darkness of the storm was -added the gloom of coming night. The boys were anxious as to what Mrs. -Bouncer might think, and they did not know what would be the outcome of -this drifting into the ocean. But they could do nothing except what they -were doing. - -They could only hope for rescue. - -The boys were taking their coffee, and eating some of the sandwiches -Silas had made, when suddenly the boat was tossed about more violently -than ever before. She rose up, with her bow high in the air, and things -in the cabin slid toward the stern. Then the bow went down and the stern -rose up. - -"What's happening?" cried Frank. - -"Listen!" exclaimed Bob. - -"That's the surf!" called Sammy. "We're going through the inlet into the -ocean!" - -There was a terrific crash of thunder, and a brilliant flash of -lightning. Looking through the bull's-eyes Bob could see the heaving -billows. Then, as the _Skip_ ceased her violent motions, and began to -move regularly up and down, Bob cried: - -"We're out to sea, boys! Think of it! Out on the ocean!" - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -DRIFTING - - -Somehow, in spite of the fact that they tried to be brave, and to meet -the danger with as stout hearts as possible, the Fairview boys could not -repress a feeling of fear as the meaning of Bob's words came to them. -And the speaker himself shuddered a little as he looked out on the -heaving waters of the ocean, as the lightning made them plain to him. - -"Well, there's one good thing," said Frank, taking a long breath, "we're -not so likely to run into anything out here as we were in the cove or -inlet." - -"No, that's so," agreed Bob. "But the ocean is an awfully big place to -be out on--in a small boat." - -"This isn't such a small boat," said Sammy, quickly. "It's better to be -in this than in our rowboat." - -"Indeed it is!" said Frank. "Maybe we'll be all right by morning." - -"That's so--we will have to stay out here all night, I guess," said Bob, -ruefully. "There'll be no chance of being picked up until daylight, I -reckon." - -"If we're picked up then we'll be lucky," added Sammy. "This is -different from Rainbow Lake and Pine Island. It's so much larger." - -"But some ship might see our lights, and come for us," suggested Frank. - -Bob shook his head. - -"I was talking to Silas about that the other day," he said. "No ships -come as close in shore as this. Some trawlers, that catch moss-bunker -fish for fertilizer, do, in the daytime, to let down their nets, but not -at night." - -"Then what chance have we of being rescued?" asked Sammy. - -"Oh, I guess we've as good a chance as any fellows would have who had -this happen to them," went on Bob. "In the morning the chances are some -ship will see us. We can make some sort of flag, for a distress signal, -I think. If we knew how we might fix our lanterns now, to show that we -needed help. But I don't know how to do it." - -Neither did the other boys, so it was decided to wait until morning. -Besides, none of them cared to go outside in the rain and darkness, now -that they were on the open ocean. It gave them a sort of "scary" -feeling. They did not say so, but they were a bit afraid, as they -admitted afterward, of falling overboard. - -The wind and rain still kept up, but the thunder and lightning were not -so bad, and for this they were glad. Then, too, they were not tossed -about so violently as they had been while in the waters of the Cove and -the inlet. - -There the shallow waters were more quickly disturbed by the wind, while -the deeper sea took longer to raise large waves. - -But, for all that, the _Skip_ swayed and rocked in the grip of the -storm, for she was but a small boat to be on such broad waters. In the -hands of Silas Warner she might have ridden more easily, for her owner -would have known how to steer her. - -Then, too, he would have started the motor, and he could have kept her -head to the wind and waves, and this is always wise in a storm. - -But the boys could only let her drift, and this meant that at times the -craft would dip down into the trough of the sea, sinking with a motion -that made the lads feel as though their stomachs were going to drop out. - -Fortunately they were not seasick, for they were too used to the water -at home, and had been in some rough weather before. So they were -accustomed to the irregular motion. But it was not the more pleasant on -this account. - -Again the _Skip_ would be blown around with her head to the wind and -waves, and at such times she would rise on the crest of a big roller -until, it seemed to the boys, as if she were going to shoot toward the -sky. - -Then the boat would slip down on the other side of the big hill of water -like a sled coasting down a snowy incline and the boys would look at -each other as though they feared they were going to the bottom of the -sea. - -But always the stanch little _Skip_ would come up again. - -"She sure is a dandy boat!" exclaimed Bob, and the others agreed with -him. - -It was now about eight o'clock and quite dark. The storm still rumbled -and rolled about the boys, but they were getting used to it now. - -"It's dying out," said Frank, as he put on some of his clothes that had -dried by the oil stove. - -"Yes, by morning it will be calm again," said Sammy. - -"If we could only get home by morning," spoke Bob, a bit sadly, and, in -spite of his resolution to be brave, he could not keep a few tears from -his eyes as he thought of his mother, who, he knew, would be frantic -about him. - -"Don't worry," said Frank, soothingly, for he guessed of what Bob was -thinking. "Silas will go there and tell your folks all about it, Bob. -Then he'll organize a searching party, and come after us in a big boat." - -"Yes, if he can find us," said Bob, gloomily. - -"Oh, sure he can find us!" exclaimed Sammy. - -There was silence for a while, with the _Skip_ drifting on in the storm -and darkness. Occasionally a bigger wave than usual would break over the -high bow, and come crashing down on the roof of the cabin. At times the -weight of water was so heavy that the boys feared the roof would be -crushed in, but the _Skip_ was made to stand hard knocks, and well she -did it. - -"Well, what are we going to do?" asked Sammy, after a bit. The boys had -put on their clothing, which was warm and dry, and they were sitting -about the cabin, looking at one another, and wondering what would happen -next. - -"What can we do?" asked Bob. "We can only drift, until morning." - -"Then I say let's go to bed," proposed Frank. "We can't do any good by -sitting up, and maybe we can get some rest." - -"But supposing some vessel runs us down in the night?" suggested Bob. - -"That isn't likely to happen with our lights burning. Besides, staying -awake won't stop that." - -The boys were tired enough to turn in and stretch out on the bunks, -though possibly they were too alarmed and excited to sleep. As Frank had -said, their outside lights, the red and green and white, were glowing, -and any vessel, seeing them, would not run them down. - -"I say let's try something before we go to bed," said Bob. - -"Try what?" asked Frank. - -"Try to make someone hear us. Let's go outside and blow the air whistle -and yell. Maybe some passing ship may hear us and take us on board." - -"That's a good idea!" exclaimed Sammy. "We'd better go out anyhow, and -look to see if the lanterns are all right. We wouldn't want them to go -out in the night." - -It was still raining, but not so hard, and, putting on the suits of -oilskins, the three chums made their way out to the open deck of the -_Skip_, behind the cabin bulkhead. - -Here they felt the full force of the wind, and the rain stung into their -faces. Also they felt the salty spray of the ocean as it blew over the -bow. All about them they could see the white-topped billows, and they -looked larger than they had from the cabin. Still the _Skip_ seemed to -ride them well. - -A glance showed the boys that the lights were all right. They were full -of oil--Silas had told them he always kept them ready for instant use. - -"Now for a yell!" called Sammy, and the boys called together. - -Several times they did this, at the same time blowing the compressed air -whistle. But there came no answer, nor could they see the lights of any -passing ship. They appeared to be alone on the ocean in the storm and -darkness. - -[Illustration: They appeared to be alone on the ocean.] - -"It's no use," said Bob, sadly. - -"No, let's go inside," suggested Frank. - -"Besides, we want to save some of the air in the tank to blow the -whistle to-morrow," went on Sammy. "We can compress the air only when -the motor is running, and we can't start that." - -"Maybe we can," suggested Bob. "I'm going to have a try at that in the -morning, if we aren't picked up before." - -"Maybe it will start by just turning the switch. Silas said it did, -sometimes," spoke Frank. - -"Well, don't try it now," exclaimed Bob, quickly. "We don't want to get -it going when we don't know which way to steer. Let's wait." - -And wait they did. - -Into the cabin they went again, out of the wind and rain. The shelter -seemed a cozy place in contrast to the blackness outside. - -"Didn't it all happen suddenly?" remarked Bob. "One minute we were at -the dock, waiting for Silas to come back, and then, all at once, the -storm came up, we broke loose, and had started to drift. It all seems -like a dream." - -"I wish it was a dream," murmured Frank, "and that we'd wake up in -Barnacle Cottage." - -"I wonder if anyone could have cut or loosened our rope," spoke Sammy, -as though he were thinking of something. - -"What makes you say that?" asked Frank quickly. "The rope broke--that's -what happened." - -"I don't know about that," went on Sammy, mysteriously. "If a person had -been on that dock, and saw the boat tied there, it would be very easy to -slip the rope off the post." - -"Yes, that's true enough," admitted Frank. "But who would do such a mean -thing as that; especially when a storm was coming up, and we would be in -danger? Who would do such a thing?" - -"Well, the queer old professor who drove us away," answered Sammy. - -"There! I knew he was going to say that!" cried Bob. - -"Oh, well, of course I'm not saying for sure," spoke Sammy, quickly. -"But it might have happened. If that old man had been around he might -have thought that was a good chance to get rid of us, so we wouldn't -bother him again." - -"Well, that's all foolishness!" exclaimed Bob. "And, even if he did it, -I'm not going to bother him again, anyhow." - -"I am!" declared Sammy. "I'm going to find out what he knows about -pirate gold!" - -Frank and Bob laughed at him, but Sammy was very much in earnest. - -On and on drifted the _Skip_, driven by wind and tide. The night wore -on, and the boys, unable to stay up any longer, went to the bunks to -rest, lashing the steering wheel to keep the rudder straight. They did -not know where they were going. They only knew they were drifting. - -The rain did not come down so hard now, and the wind had slackened. Only -once in a while did it lighten and thunder. - -It must have been near morning, for a faint, hazy light was coming in -through the bull's-eyes windows, when Sammy was suddenly awakened in his -bunk by feeling a shock. He jumped out into the middle of the cabin, -crying: - -"Fellows, we struck something! Maybe we've gone ashore!" - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -THE ABANDONED BOAT - - -Bob and Frank were so surprised by Sammy's sudden call that they could -only stare stupidly at him, and try to rub some of the sleepy feeling -from their eyes. Then, as the bumping and grinding sound still kept up, -Sammy cried again: - -"Fellows, we sure have struck something. Maybe we're at a dock! Oh, I -hope so! I guess our voyage has ended!" - -"Good!" cried Bob. - -Frank went to the forward bull's-eyes and looked out. It was getting -daylight. - -"You've got another guess coming, Sammy," he said. "We're still out on -the ocean, it looks to me. We couldn't be at a dock and be moving this -way." - -The motor boat in which they had so strangely been blown to sea was -still heaving up and down, though by the silence outside the boys -realized that the storm was over. - -"Well, we're certainly up against something," insisted Sammy. "Listen to -it bump!" - -There was no doubt about this. The motor boat was grinding and bumping -up against some object it had collided with on the ocean. And still the -boys, from the cabin windows, could see nothing. - -"Maybe," began Sammy, as his eyes grew big with wonder, "maybe it's a -whale!" - -"A whale!" cried Bob. "Listen to him, would you! That's as bad as the -pirate gold." - -"It sure is," agreed Frank, as he began to dress. - -"Pooh!" exclaimed Sammy. "It might happen just the same, and if we find -a dead whale outside you fellows won't be so ready to laugh!" - -"Oh, a dead whale--maybe yes," agreed Bob, for more than once Sammy had -been right in his queer guesses, though a number of his wild dreams of -sensational things had not proved to be true. - -"Yes, or a live whale either," went on Sammy, who was following Frank's -example in getting into his clothes, as was Bob. "Didn't you ever read -of whales scraping themselves against ships to get the barnacles off -'em." - -"Off the ships?" asked Frank, with a smile. - -"No, off the whales themselves. Anyway, I think it's barnacles. It's -some kind of stuff that grows on a whale and he doesn't like it, so he -scrapes it off whenever he can. Sometimes he scrapes up against a ship, -and maybe that's what's happened now." - -"Well, we can soon see," spoke Frank. "But if it is a whale I hope he -doesn't scrape too hard. He might upset this boat." - -"Well, we lived through one night, adrift on the ocean," remarked Sammy, -as he finished dressing. "Now we'll see what it's like outside." - -"It's stopped raining, anyhow," went on Frank. "The storm is over." - -"I'm glad of it," remarked Bob. "Now we can eat breakfast without -spilling things in our laps." - -"That's right--it is time to eat," added Sammy. - -"But first let's see what we're bumping into, or what's bumping us," -suggested Frank. - -The boys were feeling much better now. They had been rested and calmed -by their night's rest, and they had slept more soundly than they knew, -for they were tired out. Sleep was the best thing for them, as it kept -them from worrying. - -And they had good cause for worry. Three small boys, who knew little if -anything of managing a motor boat, were adrift in one on the big ocean. -The only wonder is that they were as brave as they were. - -"I wonder what mom thinks?" said Bob, as he slid back the bolt of the -cabin door. - -"She couldn't help worrying--I know mine would," spoke Sammy. "But I -think we'll be rescued to-day. Silas is most likely out looking for us -with some of his sailor friends." - -"Well, I hope he finds us soon," remarked Frank. "It's all right in -books, to read about being adrift at sea, but It isn't so much fun when -it comes to you. I'd rather be in Lighthouse Cove." - -"So would I!" cried his two chums. - -The three Fairview boys went out on the open deck of the _Skip_, and, as -they emerged from the cabin a cry of surprise came from all of them. For -the motor boat's stern was bumping and rubbing up against the side of a -small two-master schooner, which, with some sails set, was drifting -about on the ocean, abandoned, and seemingly as much at the mercy of the -wind and waves as was the _Skip_ herself. - -"Would you look at that!" cried Sammy. - -"A ship!" gasped Bob. - -"And that's your whale!" went on Frank. "Say, how did this happen?" - -None of the boys could answer. They looked off across a waste of waters. -Not another craft was in sight, and they could not see land. The sun -came up, seemingly out of the ocean itself, with the promise of a fair, -hot day. And those two vessels--the motor boat and the schooner had, -somehow, drifted together. - -That was the noise which had awakened Sammy--the gentle collision of the -craft in the ocean. Had this happened when the storm was at its height -the smaller boat might have been sunk. But the storm had passed, and the -ocean only rose and fell in a gentle swell. - -"What brought the two together?" asked Bob. - -"The wind and the tide, I guess," said Frank. Later he learned that -objects in water have a sort of attraction for one another, as pieces of -metal are attracted to a magnet. - -If you will take a basin of water, and scatter some pieces of wood or -cork on top, and then take care not to move or stir the water, you will -find, in a few minutes, that the pieces have drawn themselves together. -Sometimes only one or two will do this, and again the whole number will -form a mass to float about. - -It is this which causes masses of driftwood to float in the form of -miniature rafts, and some scientists claim that often ships, which are -not under their own power, are thus drawn together in a collision. Some -even go so far as to say that a big war vessel, for instance, even in -motion, will draw another vessel, also in motion, toward it. And not -long ago a collision of a British warship and a merchant vessel was said -to be due to this cause. - -But the boys did not stop to think of that then--indeed they had heard -nothing of it. - -All they knew was that their motor boat was up against a much larger and -more substantial vessel, and they were glad of this, for they felt, in -case of a storm, that they could take refuge on the big schooner. - -"How do you s'pose it happened that she got here?" asked Sammy, -motioning toward the ship. - -"Is there anybody aboard?" was Bob's question. - -"Let's go and see," suggested Frank, and this seemed most practical of -all. - -It was easy to board the schooner from the rail of the motor boat, as -several ropes hung over the side of the larger craft, by means of which -the boys could pull themselves up. - -"And we'd better do it while we're together," went on Frank. "If we -drift apart we might not be able to get together again." - -"First let's yell, and see if there's anybody there," suggested Sammy. -"They may all be asleep, and might not like it if we went aboard." - -"Not very likely that they're asleep," said Frank. "Someone would be on -the lookout, anyhow. And there'd be a man steering, with the sails set -as they are." - -Two of the sails were indeed set, but the main sheets, or ropes, were -loose, and the boom swung back and forth with the motion of the vessel, -so that, even had the wind been blowing, she would have made little -headway. But it was now a dead calm. - -"Come on--yell!" suggested Sammy, and the three boys raised their voices -in a shout. They waited a moment to see if they would get an answer, but -none came. - -"Come on--let's go aboard!" cried Frank, as he made for the rail, to -reach a dangling rope. - -"Wait!" suggested Bob. "Let's tie this motor boat fast, first. We may -want to come back in her again." - -[Illustration: "Let's tie the motor boat fast".] - -"Why?" asked Sammy. - -"Because, we don't know anything about that schooner," went on Bob. -"Maybe all her crew died from smallpox, or something like that. Maybe -she's sinking, and we wouldn't want to stay on board if she was. You -can't tell what makes her this way. Tie our boat fast, I say, and then, -if we want to, we can come back on the _Skip_ if we don't like it on the -_Mary Ellen_," for that was the name of the drifting schooner, as they -could see painted under her stern. - -"Good idea," exclaimed Sammy. "We can live on the _Skip_ for a while, -anyhow, if it doesn't storm again. But let's have a try on this -schooner. We'll have more room there, and if it does get rough we won't -mind it so." - -They all agreed with this plan, and soon a rope from the motor boat was -made fast to a cable from the schooner. Then, making sure they would not -lose the _Skip_, the boys pulled themselves over the rail of the _Mary -Ellen_, and landed on her deck. - -They looked about them curiously. There was not a sound except the -creaking of ropes in pulley blocks, and the rattle and bang of the sails -as they swung to and fro, not being held in check by the main sheets. - -"There doesn't seem to be anybody here," said Bob. He spoke in a low -voice, as though someone were dead. - -"Not a soul," went on Sammy, in the same quiet tones. - -The big boom of the forward sail swung across the deck over the heads of -the boys. They ducked, but there was no need for it. - -"We could make that fast, anyhow," suggested Frank. - -"That's right," agreed Bob. - -As my old readers know, the boys had sailed in the _Puff_ before it was -wrecked, and knew a little about such matters. - -By hauling on a certain rope they pulled the end of the boom, or the -bottom stick to which the sail is fastened, around so that it could not -swing so far to either side. Then they did the same with the other sail. - -"Come on, let's take a look below," said Frank. - -The boys hesitated for a moment, and then started for the companionway, -or stairs, that led below. - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -THE RESCUE - - -Standing at the head of the companionway, the three Fairview boys were -in line. Then, in some strange manner, Sammy rather got behind his two -chums. Frank noticed this at once. - -"What's the matter?" he asked, turning to Sammy. "Are you afraid to go -down?" - -"No--no--of course not!" exclaimed Sammy, quickly. "But the stairs are -so narrow----" - -"Pooh, they're wide enough for us three," said Frank. "Here, I'll go -first if you like--I'm not afraid." - -"Neither am I!" retorted Sammy, as he stepped up between his chums once -more. - -"Let's all go down together," suggested Bob. "I don't believe that -there's anything down there, but----" - -Suddenly a deep, hollow groan sounded from somewhere in the lower region -of the ship. - -"Hark!" cried Sammy. - -"Oh, we all heard it!" gasped Bob. "No need to hark! I'm going up on -deck." - -He turned to go back up the few steps he had come down, and Sammy went -with him. Only Frank stood there. - -"Say, what's the matter with you two fellows?" he asked. - -"But did you hear it?" asked Sammy. - -"Sure I heard it," said Frank. "It was----" - -But he did not need to describe it, for the sound came again, a deep, -hollow groan that seemed to vibrate all through the schooner. - -"There--there's someone down there!" panted Bob. - -"Well, what of it?" asked Frank, coolly. He did not seem nearly as -frightened as were his chums. - -"Then I'm not going down," went on Bob. "Maybe it's somebody hurt." - -"That's all the more reason why we ought to go down--he may need help, -if it's one of the sailors who couldn't get away when the others went," -insisted Frank. "Come on down." - -Frank's sensible talk made Bob and Sammy less afraid, and they again -took their positions by their chum's side, ready to descend the -companionway stairs. - -Every once in a while the groan would sound again, but the boys were not -so easily frightened now. - -As they went down they looked about, but they saw no signs of disorder -or confusion which they would have noticed had the captain and crew of -the schooner left in a hurry, or after some struggle. Everything was in -order, and it looked as if the sailors had just gone ashore in the -regular way, leaving the vessel to the wind and sea. Before going down -the boys had noticed that there were one or two small boats on the -davits, showing that if the crew had left the schooner at sea, they had -not taken all the rowing craft with them. - -"It's a queer puzzle," said Frank, as he and his chums looked about. - -"It sure is," agreed Bob. "I wonder----" - -"Hark!" cried Sammy. - -Again came that queer, groaning sound, and it was so close at hand that -the boys jumped. - -"The noise came from there," said Bob, pointing to the captain's -stateroom. - -"Maybe--maybe he's tied up in there--hurt," suggested Sammy. - -"Maybe--and maybe not!" exclaimed Frank with vigor. "I'm going to have a -look!" - -His chums glanced at him admiringly. After just a moment of hesitation, -Frank tried the knob of the stateroom door. The portal swung open -easily, and the boys eagerly looked inside. They were rather -disappointed, it must be confessed, when they did not see the body of -the captain stretched out in his berth, bound with ropes. The stateroom -was empty. - -"Well, what--what made that groaning noise?" asked Sammy. - -The groaning sound came again, and then all three of the boys saw what -it was. A chest of drawers made fast to the side of the stateroom, had -torn loose, probably when the schooner pitched and tossed in the storm, -and this chest, swaying back and forth as the vessel rolled, scraped -against the floor, making a groaning, creaking noise that sounded a good -deal like a man in pain. Now that the boys were close to it, the sound -did not seem quite so weird, but at a little distance almost anyone -would have said it was a groan. - -"And that's all it was!" exclaimed Sammy. - -"Yes," said Frank, "that's usually the way things do turn out." - -For a moment the boys stood peering about the small cabin Then Bob said: - -"Let's look around a bit more. Maybe we can find somebody, or something, -that will tell how the vessel came to be drifting this way." - -They opened the other stateroom doors, but inside all was in order. The -bunks were made up, and there was no confusion. - -"Now for the place where the crew live!" cried Sammy. - -"The fo'cas'le!" exclaimed Frank. "I should think you'd know that by -this time, Sammy." - -But they found nothing in the quarters where the crew ate and slept to -explain the mystery. Things were not as nice there as in the cabin, but -there was no disorder that would show a hasty flight from the ship. The -boys went to the galley, which is the kitchen of a ship, but as they -found a big coal range there, and did not want to kindle a fire in that, -they decided to get their meals in their own small boat, on the oil -stove. - -They had now made an inspection of the _Mary Ellen_, and they knew no -more about her than at first. It was all a strange mystery of the sea. - -"We're going along some," said Frank, as he looked over the side. - -A little breeze had sprung up, and, now that the sails of the schooner -were set to catch the wind, she went ahead through the waves, pulling -the motor boat after her. - -"Hadn't we better steer?" asked Bob. - -"No, we can tie the wheel fast, while we eat," said Frank. "She'll steer -herself then, and we won't have to bother." - -"Which way shall we steer?" asked Bob. - -"Straight ahead, I say," remarked Frank, who seemed to have taken -command. "We don't know where we are, and we don't know which way land -is, so one direction is as good as another. It will be easier to steer -straight ahead, and we may sight land that way, as well as if we set the -rudder to right or left." - -To this his chums agreed, and soon the wheel was tied fast, or "lashed" -to use the proper sea term. Then the boys pulled on the rope attached to -the motor boat, and brought the _Skip_ alongside. They could easily get -on her raised cabin deck from the schooner rail, for the larger vessel -was not very high in the water. - -"Say, hold on," said Frank, when they were about to go aboard. "What's -the matter with us bringing our grub up from there, and staying here? -It's safer here if it comes on to blow again, and we'll be more -comfortable. We can use the captain's cabin, and have more room to move -about." - -"But it will be a lot of work to cook on that big coal stove," objected -Sammy. - -"We won't have to. We can hoist the _Skip's_ oil stove up here. It isn't -very big. There's probably oil aboard here, too. I say let's stay here." - -"I do, too!" cried Bob; and so it was arranged. They went aboard the -_Skip_ to get food, for they did not feel that they should take the -stores of the schooner. - -Then the oil stove was hauled to the deck of the _Mary Ellen_ by means -of a rope. Fortunately the sea was very smooth while this was being -done, so the boys had little trouble. - -Then, rather tired from their work, and very hungry, they cooked a late -breakfast, enjoying it very much. - -"This is something like!" cried Frank, as he looked about the cozy -cabin. "This is real traveling." - -"We're not doing much traveling--we're letting the ship sail herself," -remarked Sammy. - -"Well, it's all we can do," said Bob. "And maybe we'll be worse off when -it comes to a blow. But if only mom knew where we were, and that we were -safe, I shouldn't mind. I'm afraid she'll worry, and get sick." - -"I hope not," said Frank. "But we stand a better chance now of being -picked up. Say, I never thought of it!" he cried. "We must run up a -signal of distress. If some other ship sees us now they'll never know -we're in trouble. We must run up a signal of distress." - -"How do you do it?" asked Bob. - -"The United States flag, upside down, will do," said Sammy, promptly. He -had read of that in his books. - -"Yes, that will do," agreed Frank. "Come on, let's hunt for a flag." - -It did not take them long to find one in the locker where several signal -flags were kept, and soon they discovered the right rope by which it -could be hoisted to the masthead. It was sent up, with the stars down, -and then the boys could only wait and hope. - -They made sure that the _Skip_ was well fastened to the stern of the -schooner, and the rest of the day they spent going about the ship. They -found a telescope, and with this they searched the horizon for a sight -of other vessels. - -They saw several, even without the aid of the glass, but they could not -signal to them, any more than they had already done, and the vessels -were either too far away, or else paid no attention to the reversed flag -on the mast. There was no wind to flutter it, and, naturally, it could -not very well be seen from any other ship. The boys would have to trust -to chance. - -The day passed, night came, and the boys prepared to spend another -period of darkness away from the cottage at Lighthouse Cove. True, they -were better off than the night before, and there was no storm, but they -very much wished to be safe with their folks again. - -Slowly drifting before a gentle breeze, the _Mary Ellen_ made her way -over the water. The boys found lanterns and lighted them, for they knew -the danger of being run down in the night if they displayed no signals. -They sat up rather late, and watched for the lights of some passing -craft, but saw none. - -"I know what we can do in the morning if we're not picked up," said -Frank. - -"What?" asked Sammy. - -"Make a smudge of smoke on board here. Smoke can be seen a long way, and -maybe it will bring us help." - -"We'll try it," decided Bob. - -They went to bed, but they did not sleep as well as the night before. -Morning came, and with it a dense fog. - -"That's too bad!" exclaimed Frank. "No one will see us now, and we may -be in danger of a collision." - -"Can't we do anything?" asked Sammy. - -"Yes, we can blow a horn every once in a while, if we can find one, and -ring the ship's bell. That's what they always do in a fog." - -"Then let's do it!" suggested Sammy. - -So while the fog hung about them--a damp, white blanket--the boys tooted -the horn, and clanged the bell. This was to warn other vessels not to -run into them. - -But, though they listened sharply, they heard no sounds that would -indicate another vessel to be near them. They seemed all alone on the -ocean, and they were more discouraged than before. - -True they were not cold, for the day was warm, and they had plenty to -eat. They were in a good, stout vessel, too, and in no great danger, -unless another storm should come up. - -But oh! how they wanted to be back on shore again! - -Night came, and still the fog hung down. There was hardly a breath of -air, and the _Mary Ellen_ rolled on the oily swell of the sea. The night -passed slowly, but with the morning came hope. - -Soon after sunrise the wind sprang up, and blew away the fog. Then the -breeze increased, and the sails filled out. The schooner went along at a -fast rate of speed. - -"And see!" cried Frank, "our flag shows well now. I'm sure it will be -noticed by someone, and we'll soon be rescued." - -But the morning passed, and no rescuing ship came to them. The boys, -with hearts that were much discouraged, prepared their dinner. They had -seen several vessels, but though they waved pieces of sails to attract -attention, the other craft did not change their course. They even -shouted and blew the big fog horn, but they knew they were too far off -to be heard. - -"Oh, well, we'll get picked up sometime," said Frank, as cheerfully as -he could, "and we've got enough to eat for over a week." - -The boys were at dinner in the cabin and the schooner was going along -under the pressure from a wind that was getting more and more strong. - -"Pass the beans," asked Sammy, for they had plenty of the canned -variety. - -"Hark!" exclaimed Frank, pausing midway in reaching the dish over to his -chum. "Did you hear anything?" - -"I didn't," said Sammy. - -"There it goes!" cried Frank. "Listen!" - -As they listened intently they all heard a dull boom, coming from -somewhere in the distance. - -"A cannon!" cried Bob. - -"Someone is firing at us!" exclaimed Sammy. - -"More likely it's a signal gun!" burst out Frank. "Some ship has seen -our distress signal. Come on up deck!" - -He rushed from the table, followed by the others. Then, to their -surprise and delight, they saw a steamer headed directly for them, and -from her bow there shot a puff of white smoke. It was a signal gun she -was firing, to let the boys know she was coming to their rescue. - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -TWO MYSTERIES CLEARED UP - - -"Heave to! Lower your sails and we'll send you a boat!" - -Thus came the command through a megaphone from an officer on the deck of -the steamer, which had come to a stop not far from the schooner. The -steamship had approached as close as she dared. - -The boys, all thought of breakfast forgotten now, crowded to the rail, -eager for their rescue. - -"Lower your sails!" came the command again, for the schooner was still -sweeping on. - -"That's right--we've got to stop!" shouted Frank. "Come on, fellows, -let's let down the sails." - -They knew just enough, from having sailed the _Puff_, to loosen the -proper ropes. Of course they loosened a good many wrong ones before they -got the right ones, but finally the two big sails came limply down. - -The _Mary Ellen_ slowly lost headway, and rode gently on the surface of -the ocean. - -"That's right!" came the voice through the megaphone. "Stand by to throw -us a rope. I'm sending you a boat." - -The rail of the steamer was crowded with passengers who were much -interested in the novelty of a rescue at sea. The steamer seemed to be a -coast liner, probably engaged in the fruit trade, Frank thought. - -In a few minutes a boat, containing several sailors, and someone in -command, swept around from the other side of the steamer. It came -straight for the schooner, the boys' hearts beating high with hope at -each stroke of the oars. - -"We're all right now!" cried Bob. "Oh, I hope they have a wireless -telegraph on board, so I can send word to my mother!" - -Loyal little chap! His first thought was of her whom he knew would be -worrying so! - -"Oh, there's a wireless all right," said Frank, as he pointed to the -wires strung between the signal masts of the steamer. - -"Oh, I'm so glad!" cried Bob, and there were tears of joy in his eyes. - -"But if they take us on board the steamer, what will we do with the -schooner, and the motor boat?" asked Sammy. - -"Oh, we won't have to worry about that!" cried Frank. "We've had -troubles enough. Now we're going to take it easy!" - -The boat containing the sailors came nearer. The officer looked at the -three boys curiously. Frank had tossed a rope over the side. The -schooner's rail was so low that no accommodation ladder was needed. - -"Ahoy there!" called the officer, as the sailors brought the boat -broadside to, and one of them held her there by clinging to the rope. -"What schooner is that?" - -"The _Mary Ellen_," answered Frank. - -"Where from, and where bound?" asked the officer. - -"We don't know," replied Frank, with a smile. - -"You don't know! Well, who's in command?" - -"I guess we are," went on Frank. "We picked her up yesterday, and we've -been aboard ever since. She was abandoned." - -The officer uttered a whistle of surprise. - -"I'll come aboard," he said, a moment later. "Fend off, and stand by -until I signal you," he added, to the sailors. The officer, who proved -from the lettering on his cap, to be the chief mate, was soon on the -deck of the _Mary Ellen_, and then came a series of questions. - -Frank and his chums told about all that had happened to them from the -time of being blown out to sea in the motor boat until they were seen by -the steamer. - -"It was your flag, union down, that caught our attention," the mate -said. "You're a set of plucky youngsters, and I congratulate you. Now I -suppose you'd better come aboard the steamer, unless you want to take -this schooner to port yourselves and claim the salvage money," he said -with a smile. - -"Indeed we do not!" exclaimed Bob. "We've had enough of her. I want to -send a wireless message to my mother--quick." - -"You can do that all right," said the mate. "Now I'll just have a look -about, and see what the ship's papers say. They may solve the mystery. -Then we'll go aboard the steamer." - -"But what about the _Mary Ellen_, and our motor boat?" asked Sammy. - -"Oh, we'll look out for them," promised the mate. "I'll have the captain -send a crew aboard the schooner to work her back to port, and they'll -tow your motor boat, too. You needn't worry." - -The mate went to the schooner-captain's cabin, and got what papers were -there. These showed the _Mary Ellen_ to be sailing from New York to -Savannah, Georgia, with a mixed cargo, but gave no cause for the -abandoning of the craft. However, that mystery was explained later. - -Leaving one or two of the rowers in charge of the schooner, the mate -went back with the three boys in the small boat to the steamer. There -they were received by the captain most kindly, and in his cabin they -told their strange story. - -"Well, I must say you lads are plucky!" exclaimed the commander. "And -you've done yourselves a good turn, too. That schooner has a valuable -cargo, and is worth considerable herself. Of course I shall have to lay -claim, in the name of the owners of my vessel, to most of the salvage, -for my crew will take her to port. But I will see that you boys get your -proper share." - -Bob and his chums were most surprised by their good luck. - -The passengers of the steamer heard the lads' story, and made much of -the boys, who were glad indeed to be safe on a vessel that could take -them to some place whence they could reach Lighthouse Cove again. - -Bob's first thought was to telegraph his mother that they were safe, and -soon the wireless was cracking out a message that, when it was received, -made Mrs. Bouncer a most happy mother, for it told her that Bob and his -chums were all right. - -More sailors were sent aboard the schooner to work her to the nearest -port, towing the motor boat. Then the steamer started off again, with -the boys as passengers. The captain promised to land them at a port -where they could get a train back to Lighthouse Cove, and this he did, -later in the day, sending them ashore in a launch. - -That night Bob and his chums were home again. - -By turns the boys told their story. - -"Oh, but we were so worried!" exclaimed Mrs. Bouncer. "Of course it -wasn't your fault, though. Silas kept telling us that his boat would -ride out the storm, but your father has hired a large motor boat and is -off searching for you." - -But the good news soon reached Mr. Bouncer, for it was telegraphed all -along the coast, and he heard it when he put in at a port to get -gasolene. Then he hurried back to Barnacle Cottage. - -"But what made the schooner abandoned?" asked Bob's father, when he had -heard the story. The boys did not know, but a day or so later that -mystery was cleared. - -It seemed that, just before the storm that sent Bob and his chums to -sea, the schooner had put in at a small port for a supply of fresh -water, hers having leaked away because of faulty casks. All the crew was -given shore leave, and the captain, too, went off to attend to some -business. A watchman alone was left in charge, while the _Mary Ellen_ -was docked. - -Then came a small hurricane. A neighboring vessel broke her mooring rope -and crowded down on the schooner. The latter parted her cable and swung -out into the channel. Then the wind caught her and sent her to sea, much -as the boys had been blown. In the confusion that followed no one -thought of trying to save the _Mary Ellen_ and away she went without a -soul aboard, for the watchman had fallen overboard while trying to lower -the sails. He was not, however, drowned. - -So, after all, there was not much of a mystery about the schooner. She -was claimed by her captain and crew, and her' owners gladly paid the -salvage money, of which our young heroes received their proper share. -Their parents put it in the bank for them. - -A few days later Silas Warner got back his motor boat, which had been -only slightly damaged. - -"Well, that's over," said Sammy, a few days after their return from -their unexpected voyage to sea. "Now if we could only find the pirate -gold, we'd be all right." - -"Oh, you're foolish!" exclaimed Frank. "There never was any pirate -gold." - -"Well, what was Professor Watson digging for?" demanded Sammy. - -"I don't know," said Frank, "But it wasn't gold." - -"There he is now, digging again," said Bob, quickly, "and he's on our -beach, too. I guess now we've got a right to ask him what he's after." - -Rather bashfully the boys approached the old man. He paid no attention -to them, but went on digging. Suddenly he was observed to throw aside -his shovel, make a grab for something in the sand, and then he cried -out: - -"I have it! I have it! At last I have found it!" - -Eagerly the boys rushed forward. The man did not seem to notice them, -but was closely looking at something in his hand. - -"Have you found the pirate gold?" asked Bob, boldly. - -The man looked at the boys. He did not seem annoyed now. - -"Gold! No, I wasn't looking for gold," he said. "But I have found a very -rare kind of seashell for which I have been searching all Summer. At -last my scientific collection is complete. My search is ended!" - -The boys did not know what to think. - -"Weren't you looking for gold?" asked Sammy, much amazed. - -"Gold! No, I care nothing for gold. I am a college professor and from my -studies I decided that a certain rare seashell was to be found on this -coast. I came here, and dug in many places for it. I even dug at night, -for the creature that lives in this shell is said to prefer to feed at -night. But I never had any luck until now." - -"Then you know nothing about pirates," said Sammy, sadly. - -The professor looked curiously at them. - -"Ah, I have seen you boys before," he said, musingly. - -"Yes, we followed you once," said Frank. - -"I remember now. And I drove you away. I did not mean to be impolite, -but this shell is a very delicate one, and you were walking over the -land where I thought I might find one. I feared you would crush it. -That is why I asked you to leave. But it is all right now. See, I have -the treasure," and he showed the boys a curious pink and blue shell in -his hand. To them it did not amount to much, but probably to the -scientist it was very valuable. - -The boys asked the professor about the night they had met him when the -lighthouse beacon was out. He explained that he had just received word -from an old fisherman, one of several he had told of his quest, with a -command to kept it secret, that some sort of shells, very like the one -the scientist wanted, might be found in a certain place. There the -professor went, taking a light with him, and it was thus the boys met -him. - -"And so ends that mystery," murmured Bob. - -"Well, I'm glad it's over," said Frank. "Maybe now you can think of -something else besides pirate gold, Sammy, and we can have some fun." - -"Yes, it's all over," said Sammy. "I wonder what will happen next?" - -And what did occur I will relate to you in the next volume of this -series, to be called "Fairview Boys on a Ranch; Or, Riding with the -Cowboys." - -But the days at Lighthouse Cove were not yet over. There still remained -some glorious Summer weather and the boys enjoyed it to the utmost. They -went swimming, crabbing and boating, but they never again went so near -the inlet that they were in danger of being carried out to sea. And they -neither looked for nor found the pirate gold although they did find some -very pretty seashells. - -And now we will take leave of the Fairview boys. - - -THE END. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Fairview Boys at Lighthouse Cove, by -Frederick Gordon and R. Menel - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE *** - -***** This file should be named 52143.txt or 52143.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/1/4/52143/ - -Produced by Martin Pettit and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/52143.zip b/old/52143.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f5f25c7..0000000 --- a/old/52143.zip +++ /dev/null |
